JP6927370B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[form]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image storage means for storing a plurality of images including at least a first image, a second image, and a third image.
An image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means, and an image display means.
Until the result of the determination is notified, the means for executing the variation effect by the image display means and the means for executing the variation effect.
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the display during the variation effect by the control means, the second image is the third image as compared with the case where the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. When the image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game.
When the first image is combined with the third image and displayed on the image display means, the second image is combined with the third image and displayed on the image display means. Give the player a perception that the game situation is more favorable than in the case of
The control means
A means for displaying the first image on the image display means without combining the first image with the third image, and
A means for displaying the first image on the image display means without combining with the third image, and then displaying the second image on the image display means without combining with the third image.
A means for displaying the third image on the image display means without combining the first image and the second image, and
When displaying a combination of a plurality of images, means for displaying the respective images without superimposing them on each other, and
A fourth image different from the third image, which is combined with the second image and displayed on the image display means in combination with the first image. A means for displaying a fourth image on the image display means, which gives the player a recognition that the state is more advantageous for the game situation when displayed in
A process of combining the first image and the third image and displaying them on the image display means, and a process of combining the second image and the fourth image and displaying them on the image display means. With viable means
The second image and the fourth image are combined and displayed on the image display means rather than the case where the first image and the third image are combined and displayed on the image display means. When it is done, it gives the player a recognition that the game situation is in an advantageous state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the above-described form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters. It is explanatory drawing which shows the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table set in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of the processing executed by a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of suggestion effect, specific end effect, and specific start effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which a pachinko machine executes in a standby state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of background music. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the condition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a voice light emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the start of fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the opening effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a time chart which shows the process which a pachinko machine executes in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the symbol display device at the time of performing suggestion effect in the preceding game round. It is a time chart which shows the process which a pachinko machine executes in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the process which a pachinko machine executes in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting process of an effect type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for object A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement / timing setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the advance notice effect which combined a plurality of objects. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an effect type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for BC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for ABC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel production to execute as a reach production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying the background moving image. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying a demo movie. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect moving image. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect moving image. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC effect processing executed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state transition process executed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for hold effect in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for hold effect in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display level upper limit value setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit value table in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold production content determination processing in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the table for determination of a hold effect in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for hold effect in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for hold effect in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold effect setting process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold production content determination processing in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (another example 1). It is a storage area for a hold effect in the tenth embodiment (another example 1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (another example 2). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (another example 3). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (another example 4). It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
A3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
A4. Outline of processing in standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third Embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth Embodiment (Example of setting process of production type):
F. Sixth Embodiment (Other example of effect type setting process):
G. Seventh Embodiment (configuration including RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Modification example:
L. About the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 that is combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, or the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor that detects the amount of dynamic operation by the change in electrical resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out the prize balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the above, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10 such as the payout device 71 are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are opened upward, and the first starting port 33 is arranged vertically side by side so as to be above the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win a prize in the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that do not win in various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 43.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning and is second. It is possible to win a prize in the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win a prize. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a big hit lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in an open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 33, when the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 34, even if the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. The first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is made to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. Have a predetermined display be performed. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

When a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is made to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. Have a predetermined display be performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode to be displayed as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the normal drawing unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display or a light emitting display by an LED lamp, and are, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery during and the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined mode, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. A round game is an opening / closing door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the variable winning device 36. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be composed of various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first result display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. .. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 in a variable manner. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol string Z1, the symbol column Z3, and the symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the display is stopped, and the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol such as the number.

Here, the game times is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined value on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the required operating power by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, and the like, and supplies the power supply device 85 to each device. Supply power. Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has won a prize in each winning opening during the game. Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , The main display unit 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Display control of.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the winning of the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning of the first starting opening 33 is specified. In that case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a prize is specified for the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And controls the display control device 100. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery as to whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and fluctuated.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The hold information storage area 64b is composed of a first hold area Ra, a second hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold quantity storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are sequentially stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. Is remembered in.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second starting port 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the prize is won. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7 (b) shows a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is 20 under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 has a configuration in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 33, and the hold information is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second start port 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number is reached. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a probability variation lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a high probability win / loss table as a win / loss table, and a win / loss table. It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the jackpot is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening is the same. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination opening is won may be set more often, and one opening time may be set longer. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first starting port 33 is higher than that of the second starting port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning of the second starting port 34 is higher than that of the first starting port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. Can be done.

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric service open state more frequently than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric power in the electric accessory opening lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning role. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are prepared for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed, the frequency is low in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a plurality of types of jackpots are sorted by using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R probability variation jackpot. Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all the jackpots based on the winning of the second starting port 34 are probabilistic jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting port 34.

As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot type between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is provided with a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the second starting port 34 of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 will be awarded a prize. If the result is lost in the winning / failing lottery, the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode, and the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the update value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb is for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the execution area AE. It is checked against the table to determine whether to generate reach. However, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, with the reach line formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. Further, when the reach effect is performed or whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed before the reach display is performed, the reach random number counter C3 or other counters are used to determine. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, when C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and when C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first start port 33, and the second hold area Rb. The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second start port 34 corresponds to the hold information, and these hold information becomes the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking the two cases of case a1 and case a2 as examples.

In FIG. 9A, as case a1, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “big hit”), and the jackpot is executed in the second game round after the first game round. It shows the process to be executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is missed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game times immediately before the first game time is missed, and there is no other game time between the first game time and the second game time. I will explain. It should be noted that there may be other game times between the first game time and the second game time. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the advance notice effect and the reach effect. The advance notice effect is an effect executed immediately before or after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and is an effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect that is executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big hit is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The special gaming state is a state in which a privilege is given to the player. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special gaming state. As the opening effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the opening / closing execution mode is started. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the open / close execution mode, a predetermined effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, the period for executing the ending effect is referred to as the ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the effect that has already been executed is reproduced. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game round are reproduced. Further, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suggestion effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect described later. FIG. 10 (a) shows a suggestive effect, FIG. 10 (b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10 (c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect suggesting that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, that is, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect during the ending period, and then performs the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round as the special game state reproduction effect. Reproduce and execute. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced, but the advance notice effect, reach effect, or result executed in the first game round. Only a part of the announcement effect may be reproduced. For example, when executing the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect as the special game state reproduction effect, the reach effect and result announcement effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the advance notice effect is omitted. May be good. By omitting some or all of the advance notice effects that are performed frequently during normal times, and preferentially reproducing the reach effects and result notification effects (big hit notifications) that are executed only at the time of reach or jackpot, the player can play. It is possible to execute a special game state reproduction effect by focusing on the effect that is strongly desired to be reproduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the content of the symbol to be displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed is actually displayed in the first game round. The contents of the design are partially different.

After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character has completed the special game state reproduction effect.

The explanation is returned to FIG. 9 (a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special gaming state at the same time as the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is out of the question. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal advance notice effect (also referred to as a normal advance notice effect) for announcing the result of the jackpot lottery and a result announcement effect (off notification). The case a1 has been described above.

Next, the case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows, as case a2, a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. ..

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the advance notice effect and the reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big hit is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special gaming state. As the opening effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the opening / closing execution mode is started. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect during the ending period.

In the case of case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestion effect is the same as the content of the suggestion effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special gaming state when the suggestion effect ends. That is, the ending period in the case of case a2 is shorter than the ending period in the case of case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special gaming state when the suggestion effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect as an effect in the second game time. The game time reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, as the game time reproduction effect, the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. That is, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect and also has a function as a result notification for the big hit lottery of the second game time. Then, with the end of the game round reproduction effect, the second game round is finished.

As will be described later using a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. That is, in the case of case a2, since both the first game times and the second game times are the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won, the fluctuation time of the first game times and the fluctuation of the second game times The time is the same. Therefore, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is controlled to be constant, but the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is set by using random numbers. , The fluctuation time of the game times at the time of a big hit may be different each time. In this case, if the second game time is longer than the first game time, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game time and the first game time at the start of the second game time. You may use (surplus time) to perform a suggestion effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each length of the surplus time, the suggestion effects can be executed at the start of the second game even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestion effect executed by using the surplus time will be executed after the suggestion effect executed in the special gaming state after the first game round. Therefore, it is assumed that the content of the suggestion effect executed by using the surplus time is set so that the suggestion effect executed in the special game state and the suggestion effect executed by using the surplus time have continuous contents. May be good. By doing so, even if the second game time is longer than the first game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

If the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only a part of the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game time is executed as the game time reproduction effect. May be. For example, when executing the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect as the game time reproduction effect, the reach effect and result announcement effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the advance notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game time. May be executed. By omitting some or all of the advance notice effects that are performed frequently during normal times, and preferentially reproducing the reach effects and result notification effects (big hit notifications) that are executed only at the time of reach or jackpot, the player can play. It is possible to preferentially reproduce a production that is strongly desired to be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 9B, after the end of the second gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect of the special gaming state. When the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second game round, the specific start effect is executed as the opening effect of the subsequent special game state.

FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and is in a special game state (opening and closing) due to the jackpot in the second game round. It is an effect that suggests that the execution mode) is started. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect. In this case, the effect and the ending effect (normal ending effect) executed in the open / close execution mode are the effects executed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special gaming state ends.

The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As described in case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is missed, the advance notice effect, reach effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect were executed in the first game time. It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect, and the player also recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect that are executed after the suggestion effect have already been executed in terms of the effect. Although it is executed as an effect of reproducing the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 was previously viewed, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to predict that he will win the big hit lottery related to the second game, while recognizing that it is just a reproduction of the production. In such a state, after the advance notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game round, when it is announced by the result notification effect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round has been won, the player For the first time at that time, the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effect executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, the game is given unexpectedness and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the effect to be performed. Further, by making the second game round in case a2 an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to predict that he / she has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to further add unexpectedness to the game.

Further, as in case a2, when the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game time, the result notification effect in the second game time is executed. Even if it is done, the player may not notice that he has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but after the end of the second game round, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. , At the time when the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that he / she has won the big hit lottery in the second game round.

A4. Outline of processing in standby state:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after the game round is completed and neither the special game round nor the next game round has been started.

FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state. FIG. 11 shows a state diagram showing whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, a display mode of the symbol display device 41, and an output of voice output from the voice emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. Further, FIG. 11 shows an ON / OFF state of the standby state flag in the main control device 60, an ON / OFF state of the transition condition establishment flag in the main control device 60, and a cue determination flag in the voice emission control device 90. The ON and OFF states of are shown. These flags will be described later.

A number such as "01" described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicates a temporal position of the moving image data, and "01" indicates a starting position of the moving image data. The time position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with the time length, and is the time position of the video when the video data is captured in the time length. The position of the corresponding video data. As the time position of the moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the time position of "30", it returns to the time position of "01" and is displayed from the beginning.

A number such as "01" described in the audio output content indicates a temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates a head position of the music data. The temporal position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the music when the music data is captured in the temporal length. The position of the corresponding music data. As the time position of the music data, for example, a time code recorded in the music data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output up to the time position of "30", it returns to the time position of "01" and is output from the beginning.

The display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the background moving image in the game round in which the display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and the symbol moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 even in the standby state after the game round is completed. Is displayed continuously. The background moving image is a moving image displayed on the background side of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and when an image or moving image such as the above-mentioned advance notice effect or reach effect is displayed, the background image or moving image is displayed on the background side of the image or moving image. Is displayed. The background moving image of the present embodiment is a moving image in which the character is dancing to the rhythm of the background music described later.

The voice emission control device 90 outputs background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the above-mentioned background video in the game round from the speaker 46, and also causes the background music from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game round is completed. Is continuously output. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background moving image, and has the same time length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the background music at the time position "10" is output at the timing when the background video at the time position "10" is displayed, so that the background music is displayed and the rhythm of the background music is displayed. A one-to-one correspondence between and is realized.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main control device 60 turns on the standby state flag when the game round ends, that is, when the movement of the symbol on the main display unit 45 stops (time t1). Then, when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting either the special game state or the next game round after the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 has stopped and the main control device 60 has entered the standby state. That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the transition condition establishment flag is turned ON, and the standby state flag is turned OFF (time t2).

The transition condition is to shift the audio output mode from the mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player to the mode in which the background music volume is zero (silence state), and the symbol display device 41. This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the audio output mode shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background music is cut off, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is cut off. .. The demo video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video, and is a video for conveying the attractiveness of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demo video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the game method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and the characters and stories appearing in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. The demo video may also be called an attract video.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the voice emission control device 90 outputs the background music at a volume preset by the player (time t2). The volume of the background music is reduced (faded out) with the passage of time (the mode from time t2 to time t3) while the output of the background music is continued, and the volume of the background music is zero. It shifts to a certain aspect (aspect after time t3). In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 continues to output the background music until 5 seconds have elapsed after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and after the volume of the background music becomes zero. The output of the background music is stopped at the timing (time t4) when 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume preset by the game ball is the maximum volume.

When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 shifts the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode of displaying the demo movie 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero (time). t4). The voice emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demo moving image is started (time t4). The cueing determination flag is a flag for determining whether to start displaying and outputting the background video and the background music from the temporal start position "01" when the return condition described later is satisfied. be. In the present embodiment, the cueing determination flag is such that the sound output mode shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background music is cut off, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is cut off. It is turned on when it shifts to.

After the transition condition is satisfied, the main control device 60 sets the return condition when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the game rotation (display of variation in the symbol) is started. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the transition condition establishment flag is turned off. The return condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound output mode is returned to the mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (time t5), the cue determination flag Is ON, the display control device 100 and the voice emission control device 90 execute the cueing process of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal top position "01" of the background moving image. The voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, and outputs the background music from the temporal top position "01" of the background music. To start. Therefore, both the background video and the background music are displayed and output from the beginning position in time.

The voice emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and cue the background music and the background moving image (process of starting the output of the music or the display of the moving image from the temporal start position "01"). ) Is executed, the type of background music to be cueed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 selects a plurality of types of background music corresponding to the plurality of types of background music. The background video that can be displayed and corresponds to the selected background music may be selected and the cueing process may be executed. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of background music and background moving images can be viewed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (time t4), the cueing determination flag Is OFF, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the voice emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. To execute. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of the background music. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cue determination flag is OFF, so that the display control device 100 displays the background on the symbol display device 41. The mode of displaying the moving image is continued, and the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11). The display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from a predetermined time position of the background moving image. Further, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined time position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the time position for starting the display of the background video changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started, the demo video is displayed. When the configuration starts displaying the background video from the temporal position of the background video displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the display mode, or when returning from the demo video display mode to the background video display mode. After shifting from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video, the configuration is determined based on the elapsed time since the mode of displaying the demo video is shifted to the time position of the background video to start displaying. In addition to continuing the playback of the background video as an internal process, when returning from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video, the configuration of displaying the background video continuously being played as an internal process, etc. Can be mentioned.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts the display from the temporal start position "01" of the background music, and the sound emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the time middle position of the background music and the output is started from the time middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background music and the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the background music, the player can wait after the return condition is satisfied. Since the background video and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the background video and the background music may feel uncomfortable or unsatisfactory because some parts of the background video and the background music are not viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background video and the background music can be viewed from the beginning position in time by the player, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and also to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the background video and the background music can be viewed from the beginning of the time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of the background music (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. , The voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode without any discomfort in a natural flow.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting either the special gaming state or the next gaming round after the gaming round is completed. The volume of the background music can be reduced over time in a state where it is highly likely that the person is not playing the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game round is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound is heard. Since the output mode returns to the mode of outputting the background music at a volume preset by the player, it is possible to improve the expectation that the game round has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the processing shown in the cases a1 and a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is used. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the winning process for the starting port accompanying the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a winning process for through winning is executed in association with winning the through gate 35. The details of the winning process for through in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize processing for starting port>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14: S104).

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting port. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. To set. Then, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 34. 2 Judgment is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. To set. Then, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the main starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding hold areas, that is, step. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in S210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14). The value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, the pre-determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the information before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the hold command.

In the hold command, the hold information determines that a prize has been generated in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the judgment result by the prior judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the prize, and the hold information is the main control device. This is a command for the control device on the sub side to confirm before the target of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33, the number of hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of holds the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S213) of the winning process for the starting port.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pre-determination process. As described above, in the pre-judgment process, based on the hold information, the hold information determines the winning / failing of the jackpot lottery, the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach, etc., and the hold information is the jackpot by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 15) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by this winning is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the winning before this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probabilistic big hit that occurs before the big hit lottery by this winning is judged. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by this prize is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step S303 (S302: YES), and the winning / failing table storage area Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S302: NO) at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current winning is executed as the game round, the process proceeds to step S304 for the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the winning / failing table of, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. If it is acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and is stored in the storage area by winning a prize at the starting port this time. The value of the reach random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S313 that the reach generation is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (S313: NO), the pre-determination process is terminated as it is.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning process for through will be described. The winning process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14: S105).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a winning process for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is determined. The number of reserved accessories SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S402 that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the winning process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step S402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (S402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The winning process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game times control process, a big hit lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, when the standby state elapses for a predetermined time, each control device on the sub side executes a standby process for starting the demo moving image. The details of the standby process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In step S510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S510: NO), in step S511 and step S512, until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503 and each process from step S503 to step S508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S503 to step 507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S506) of the normal process.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, open / close execution mode flag, and ending period flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special gaming state, and the processing after step S602 is performed. This game time control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, in the special gaming state, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been generated in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the game is not in the special gaming state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variation display flag is turned on when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0". When the total number of reserved items CRN is "0", it means that the number of items on hold for starting is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S603 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S603: YES), the game times control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the total number of reserved items CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. The details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S605, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the standby state flag is turned off. The standby state flag is a flag that is turned on when the standby state is started and turned off when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started or when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state was started. be. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S608, it is determined whether or not the transition condition establishment flag is ON. The transition condition establishment flag is a flag that is turned on when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the standby state, and turned off when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started. If it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition establishment flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition establishment flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game times control process is terminated.

In step S609, a return condition satisfying command is set. The return condition establishment command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been started, that is, that the return condition has been satisfied. After executing step S609, the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, the transition condition establishment flag is turned off. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S602: YES), the game round progress processing of steps S611 to S615 is executed.

In step S611, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game times has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S612, the game times control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613 to execute the fluctuation end processing. In the variation end processing, the result display unit is displayed so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 21) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S614, the standby state flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S615 to execute the standby state time setting process. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game times control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the hold information stored first is stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. When the hold information stored first among the hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

If it is determined in step S701 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first hold area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S701, when it is determined that the hold area to be processed is not the first hold area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb (step S701: NO). ), The data setting process for the second holding area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

In step S702, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S703 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step S701, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S701: NO). The process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the total number of reserved CRNs is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S710, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step S713.

In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S605) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is turned off when the normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S801 that the mode is high probability mode (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, the winning / failing determination is performed with reference to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big hit winning. In step S804, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, in order to set the processing and the stop result for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning. Executes the processing of.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the 16R probability variation jackpot numerical range, the 8R probability variation jackpot numerical range, the 16R normal jackpot numerical range, and the 8R normal jackpot numerical range. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the 16R probability variation jackpot numerical range, the 8R probability variation jackpot numerical range, the 16R normal jackpot numerical range, and the 8R normal jackpot numerical range. Determine if it is included in. After executing the process of step S806 or step S807. The process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S809, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step S811 is performed. move on.

In step S811, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S804, if the result of the big hit lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big hit (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variation display in the state where either the stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for when the stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S814, the fluctuation time setting process is executed. The fluctuation time setting process is to set the fluctuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. It is the processing of. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

In step S815, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start port 33, and whether or not reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S814 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S814 are included. After executing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

In step S818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as the jackpot type information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

In step S819, among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is specified to be the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Fluctuating time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 21: S814) of the variation start process.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer 64a in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is a winner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S902 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not a win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905 to determine whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Since this process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game times is not won in step S902, in step S905, reach occurs among the game times not won in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach will occur (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S906, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S905 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the variation time table for non-reach generation table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved CRNs increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when the reach occurs, and the fluctuation time which is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time which is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of the missed reach may be different. good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the normal jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the deviation reach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete deviation may be set individually.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S507) of the normal process.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period. As described with reference to FIG. 9, the ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special gaming state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002 to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S1004 that the timing is not the end of the variation display (S1004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the variation display has ended (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result (big hit lottery result) of this game time shifts to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step S1005, if it is determined that the game result (result of the jackpot lottery) of this game time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag is entered. Is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1007 to turn off the high probability mode flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as the opening time) in the special gaming state. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, the opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1011 it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1013.

In step S1013, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. If it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is a 16R probability variation flag or a 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015 and is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set "16" in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is an 8R probability variation flag or an 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016 and is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1015 or step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017.

In step S1017, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning prize is won. The mouth 36a is opened. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S1018, the process proceeds to step S1019.

In step S1019, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1019: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1021, the round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

In step S1022, the condition determination process is executed. The condition determination process is a process for determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game round, the suggestive effect is executed during the ending period, and the effect executed in this game round during the fluctuation time of the next game round (notice production, reach production, and It is determined whether or not a process for executing the reproduction of the result notification effect (big hit notification) is performed. The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

In step S1023, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as the ending time) in the special game state. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

In step S1024, the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step S1024, the process proceeds to step S1025.

In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

In step S1026, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. If it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S1028, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1028, the process proceeds to step S1029.

In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1030 to execute the standby state time setting process. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing step S1030, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1026: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening will be described. The winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: 1017) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1101 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the driving state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, the setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, a release command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command of normal processing. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a prize has been generated (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and the value of the prize counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or when it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 to execute the large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to the non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S1112.

In step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1113: YES), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process proceeds to step S1115 to set the closing command. After that, the opening and closing process of the big winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is a normal process. In the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503), the sound is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, displays the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed with the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Condition judgment processing>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1022) of the game state transition process.

As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. The condition for enabling the processing of case a2 is that the jackpot lottery in the first game round is won and the jackpot lottery in the second game round is also won. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the open / close execution mode after winning the jackpot lottery in the game round, and is a process of determining whether or not to win the jackpot lottery in the next game round.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the condition determination process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved CRN> 0. By executing this process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game time immediately after the special game state when the special game state after the first game time is executed. If there is no game time, there is no game time corresponding to the second game time that can execute the game time reproduction effect immediately after the suggestion effect, and the processing of case a2 cannot be executed. ..

If it is determined in step S1201 that the number of reserved items CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the number of reserved items CRN> 0 is not (S1201: NO), the condition determination process is terminated as it is.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game round is read out. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out by winning the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 15). Then, the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the next game round is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204, and the hit / miss table for the low probability mode stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game time reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. A flag used to prevent execution. If it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208 and the condition fulfillment flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, a condition satisfying command is set. The condition satisfying command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfying flag is ON. The condition satisfying command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. After that, the condition determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or when it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. (S1207: YES), the present condition determination process is terminated as it is.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1023) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition fulfillment flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is the timer for the ending time. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming round in the case of case a2 of FIG. In the case of case a2, only the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required for executing the suggestion effect. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. After that, the ending time setting process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming round in the case of case a1 of FIG. In the case of case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds is secured as the ending time required for executing the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestion effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1307 to set the effect duplication avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. After executing step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting the ending time in the special gaming state after the second gaming round in the case of case a2 of FIG. In the case of case a2, the normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending effect.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1028) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is turned on in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, that state is maintained. .. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1404, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S1410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1407 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, that state is maintained. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the migration process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electrical support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S508) of the normal process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S1506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the opening / closing execution mode is not (S1507: NO) in step S1507 and the high-frequency support mode is in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1512: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is “0”. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S1513 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1513 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1514 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1515.

In step S1515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on receiving the low frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process.

If it is determined in step S1507 that the open / close execution mode is set (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S1517.

In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1516 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S1517 that the support is not won (S1517: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1517 that the support is won (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1519, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing unit 38. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

In step S1520, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S1521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1501 that the supporting flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1522, and the electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing control process>
Next, the electric service opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: S1522) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1602: NO), the main power opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1605: NO), the main power opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the main power opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the process proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the open / close execution mode is set (S1609: YES), or if it is determined in step S1610 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612 and the second step is performed. “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<Standby processing>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S509).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the standby process. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), the standby process is terminated.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Is determined. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the process proceeds to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the standby process is terminated.

In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1704 to turn on the transition condition establishment flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the transition condition establishment command is set. The transition condition establishment command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state was started, that is, that the transition condition has been satisfied. After executing step S1705, the standby process is terminated.

A6. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, and the like executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. An effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, a command correspondence process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, the standby state transition process for reducing the audio output level (volume) or starting the demo moving image is executed in the standby state. The details of the standby state transition process will be described later. After executing step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804.

In step S1804, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process in step S1802. After executing step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805.

In step S1805, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command correspondence process in step S1802. After executing step S1805, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1802).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command correspondence processing will be described below.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not a start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1901 that the start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1902 to execute the start-up command correspondence process. The details of the start-up command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the start-up command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

In step S1903, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904 to execute the hold command correspondence process. The details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing step S1904.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1906, the effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect to be executed in this game round, a reach effect, a stop pattern, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. The details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1909, the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the open / close execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After executing step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910.

If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

In step S1910, it is determined whether or not a condition satisfying command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfying command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. Turn on the side condition fulfillment flag. After executing step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfying command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the process proceeds to step S1913, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. Turn on the optical side effect duplication flag. After executing step S1913, the process proceeds to step S1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has not been received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect in the ending period is set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON / OFF information of the sound light side condition fulfillment flag. be. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1920.

If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

In step S1916, it is determined whether or not a transition condition satisfying command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 and the volume reduction flag is turned ON. The volume reduction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, is turned on at the timing of starting the process of reducing the audio output level (volume), and is turned on at the timing when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag to be turned off. After executing step S1917, the process proceeds to step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition establishment command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

In step S1918, it is determined whether or not a return condition satisfying command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919 and the return condition establishment flag is turned ON. The return condition establishment flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned ON when starting the process of returning the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demo video, and the audio output level (sound output level (volume)). This is a flag that is turned off when the volume) is restored and the demo video is finished. After executing step S1919, the process proceeds to step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition establishment command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the high-frequency support mode command, the low-frequency support mode command, the open command, and the close command are set. Further, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Processing for startup command>
Next, the process corresponding to the start-up command will be described. The start-up command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command correspondence process (FIG. 33: S1902).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start-up command correspondence process. As described above, the start-up command correspondence process is a process executed when a start-up command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the processing corresponding to the start-up command will be described.

In step S2001, the demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The demo video start command is a command for causing the display side MPU 102 to start displaying the demo video. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video start command starts a process for displaying the demo video on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, the demo moving image display flag is turned ON. The demo video display flag is a flag indicating that the demo video is displayed on the symbol display device 41, is turned on when the demo video display is started, and is turned off when the demo video display is finished. It is a flag to be set. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, the cue determination flag is turned ON. As described above, the cue determination flag starts output and display from the temporal beginning position of the background music and the background video when the return condition is satisfied and the output of the background music and the display of the background video are started. It is a flag for determining whether or not. When the cue judgment flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when starting the output of the background music and the display of the background video, the output and display are started from the temporal beginning position of the background music and the background video. do. After executing step S2003, the process corresponding to this start-up command is terminated.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command correspondence process (FIG. 33: S1904).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. As described above, the hold command correspondence process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the processing corresponding to the pending command will be described.

In step S2101, the update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the number of holding information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and the holding of these A process for making the total number of pieces of information identifiable on the sound light side MPU 92 is executed. The details of the update process at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. In the following, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first holding number", and the number of holding information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is referred to as the "first holding number". It is also referred to as a "second hold quantity", and the total number of the first hold quantity and the second hold quantity is also referred to as a "total hold quantity". After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 specified in step S2101, and the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34. The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display unit 37c and the second hold display unit 37d is controlled based on the above. After executing step S2102, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Update process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the sound is emitted. The update process of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold quantity counter area is updated to the information of the hold quantity included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2201, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the command was transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the update process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. .. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command to be read this time. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

The reason why the processing of step S2202 and step S2203 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is stored in the main control device 60. While the memory is retained, the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of reserved information being held does not match the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items to be included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step S2204, the update process of the total number of reserved counter areas provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of reserved information counter area is the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34. It is a counter area for identification in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum information of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of the final winning is completed.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game round. .. Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the jackpot type, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, the effect type setting process is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the advance notice effect and the reach effect in the game times. The setting process of the effect type will be described later. After executing step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304.

In step S2304, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. After executing step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305.

In step S2305, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to this game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the received variation command. If it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to this game round has been won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process of step S2303 are stored. This process is performed in order to reproduce the effect in the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won. After executing step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to this game round has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to the case a2 described with reference to FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2308, the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process related to the previous game round is read out. Then, the process proceeds to step S2309.

In step S2309, the effect type setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, an effect having the same content as the effect executed in the previous game round is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2310.

In step S2310, the stop symbol setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern read in step S2308. That is, a stop symbol having the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game round is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2311, the variation display pattern setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, a variation display pattern having the same content as the variation display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2312.

In step S2312, information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step S2313, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed, and then the effect setting process ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2314) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the change command received this time is the first change command (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402, and the first hold number counter stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is set. Subtract one. Then, the process proceeds to step S2404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the variable command received this time is not the first variable command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the number of second pending numbers stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is stored. The counter is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S2404.

In step S2404, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold quantity stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1908) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

In step S2502, the normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In the present embodiment, as described in case a2 of FIG. 9, as an opening effect in the special gaming state, an opening effect to be executed only in a special case such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10C) is prepared. doing. In step S2502, a start effect (normal start effect) to be executed except for a special case such as case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2505.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504, and the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2505, the opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received opening effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2505, the opening effect setting process ends.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1915) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the sound / light side effect duplication flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound / light side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestion effect, special game state reproduction effect, and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game turn in case a1 of FIG. 9, step S2603 is performed. move on.

In step S2603, the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read out. Then, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. After that, the process proceeds to step S2605, and the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special gaming state after the first gaming round in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2609.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the sound / light side condition fulfillment flag is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined that the effect (suggestion effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2606, the suggestion effect is set as the ending effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S2609.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound / light side effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, when it is determined that the effect corresponding to the ending period (normal ending effect) in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special gaming state ends. Then, the process proceeds to step S2608.

In step S2608, the sound / light side effect duplication flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2605, step S2606 or step S2607 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2609, the ending effect setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game round are shown. When the voice emission control device 90 stores the information and executes the special game state reproduction effect, a part of the ending command is a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed again in the first game round. By transmitting from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, the symbol display device 41 is made to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game round from the voice emission control device 90 as a part of the ending command, the MPU 102 receives the command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written to the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at the timing of image update when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for this game on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame and gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 according to a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41 for display. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially gives drawing instructions to the VDP 105 for the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby performing the effect type and the stop symbol executed in the first game round. , The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above process, but as other processes for executing the special game state reproduction effect, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 include others. The processing of may be adopted. For example, as in the present embodiment, instead of the process of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game round in the voice emission control device 90, the sound emission control device 90 displays the information. A command is transmitted to the control device 100 instructing the control device 100 to temporarily store the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round. The display control device 100 temporarily stores the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round according to the command.

After that, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a command to the display control device 100 indicating that a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. .. The display control device 100 can execute the special game state reproduction effect by giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table according to the command. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processes for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Standby state transition process>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1803).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition process. In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition establishment flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demo moving image display flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demo moving image display flag is ON (S2702: YES), the standby state transition process ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start waiting flag is a flag for the audio emission control device 90 to specify that the period is waiting for the start of the demo video, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag that is turned off when 5 seconds have passed without the recovery condition being satisfied after the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo video start waiting flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the process proceeds to step S2704.

In step S2704, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the process proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), the standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S2705, a process of reducing the audio output level (volume) is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 levels, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one level is executed. In the present embodiment, since the standby state transition process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, the audio output level (volume) becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706.

In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707, the volume reduction flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2708 to wait for the start of the demo video. Turn on the flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), the standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S2709, the demo video start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set in the demo moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the audio output level (volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a 2 msec cycle. NS. After executing step S2709, the standby state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo video start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the 5-second demo video start waiting period has expired. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the 5-second demo video start waiting period ends. It is determined that the test has been performed. If it is determined in step S2710 that the demo moving image start waiting period has ended, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the demo moving image start waiting period has not ended, the standby state transition process ends.

In step S2711, the background music output stop process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S2712, and the demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video start command starts a process for displaying the demo video on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2713.

In step S2713, the demo video start waiting flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2714 to turn on the demo video display display flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S2715, the cueing determination flag is turned ON, and the standby state transition process is completed.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S2701: YES), the process proceeds to step S2716 to determine whether or not the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the process proceeds to step S2717 to restore the audio output level (volume) to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the audio output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2717, the process proceeds to step S2718.

In step S2718, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the process proceeds to step S2719 to turn off the volume reduction flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S2720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), the process proceeds to step S2720 without executing step S2719.

In step S2720, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demo video start waiting is ON (S2720: YES), the process proceeds to step S2721 and the demo video start waiting flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S2722, and the return condition establishment flag is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demo video start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition establishment flag is turned off. After executing step S2722, the standby state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the process proceeds to step S2723, and the demo moving image end command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video end command executes a process for ending the display of the demo video. After executing step S2723, the process proceeds to step S2724, and the demo moving image display flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2725.

In step S2725, the background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving the background moving image start command, the display side MPU 102 starts a process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal beginning position. Then, the process proceeds to step S2726.

In step S2726, the audio output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the audio output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2726, the process proceeds to step S2727.

In step S2727, the background music output start process is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporal beginning position of the background music. After that, the process proceeds to step S2728, and the cueing determination flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S2729, the return condition establishment flag is turned off, and the standby state transition process is completed.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed from the time the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the process that is executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S2801, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S2802.

In step S2802, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt enable setting is executed, infinite loop processing is executed in the main processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is given every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S3001, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 43), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (S3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later.

In step S3002, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S3001) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S3002). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on this information, and together with a drive signal, displays an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S3005, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt process (FIG. 44: S3001).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102 to execute the display start process of the effect corresponding to the effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104 to execute the display start process of the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, after the opening effect is completed, the image drawing and display control is started so that the open / close execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3106 to execute the display start process of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demo video start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3108 to execute the demo video display start process. Specifically, the image drawing and display control is started so that the demo moving image specified by the demo moving image start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demo video is repeated until the demo video end command described later is received. After executing step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demo moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3110 to execute a process of ending the display of the demo moving image. Then, the process proceeds to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3112 to execute the process of starting the display of the background moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal top position. After executing step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

In step S3113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and the process corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-mentioned effect operation command is stored, the process when the above-mentioned effect operation command is stored is executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is missed as in case a1, the advance notice effect and reach effect executed after the suggestion effect. The result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, and the player also recognizes that the effect is an effect that reproduces the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect that are executed after the suggestion effect have already been executed in terms of the effect. Although it is executed as an effect of reproducing the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 was previously viewed, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to predict that he will win the big hit lottery related to the second game, while recognizing that it is just a reproduction of the production. In such a state, after the advance notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game round, when it is announced by the result notification effect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round has been won, the player For the first time at that time, the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effect executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, the game is given unexpectedness and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the effect to be performed. Further, by making the second game round in case a2 an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to predict that he / she has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to further add unexpectedness to the game.

Further, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won in case a2, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed in the effect, but actually. Is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, there are cases where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, and cases where it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect. In terms of production, it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed production, but in reality, at least three cases are set, one is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from a predetermined time position of the background moving image. Further, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined time position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts the display from the temporal start position "01" of the background music, and the sound emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the time middle position of the background music and the output is started from the time middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background music and the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the background music, the player can wait after the return condition is satisfied. Since the background video and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the background video and the background music may feel uncomfortable or unsatisfactory because some parts of the background video and the background music are not viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background video and the background music can be viewed from the beginning position in time by the player, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and also to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the background video and the background music can be viewed from the beginning of the time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of the background music (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. , The voice emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode without any discomfort in a natural flow.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting either the special gaming state or the next gaming round after the gaming round is completed. The volume of the background music can be reduced over time in a state where it is highly likely that the person is not playing the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game round is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the background music is played. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player, the expectation that the game round has started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, and the first game round. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game times and the second game times are continuous has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as the case b1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round, and the first The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a preceding game time) exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described. In addition, the big hit lottery in the preceding game times is out of the question.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the advance notice effect and the reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big hit is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect indicates the beginning of the special game state (normal opening effect), and the ending effect indicates the end of the special game state. Execute the ending effect (normal ending effect). That is, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect of the special gaming state as in the case a2 of FIG. 9B.

When the special game state is completed, the preceding game times are executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when performing a suggestion effect in the preceding game round. As shown in the figure, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed during the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, the suggestion effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbol in a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game times. Further, the variable display and the stop display of the symbol may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the symbol may be blinked and lit. .. Even in this way, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game times.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round after executing the preceding game round. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time as the effect in the second game time. That is, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect and also has a function as a result notification for the big hit lottery of the second game time. Then, with the end of the game round reproduction effect, the second game round is finished.

Since the jackpot lottery has been won in the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the end of the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect of the special gaming state. When the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second game round, the specific start effect is executed as the opening effect of the subsequent special game state.

The second embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following processing.

When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect executed in the first game round (notice in the present embodiment) is the same as the process executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307). Memorize the production, reach production, and result notification production). The content to be stored is not limited to the effect itself executed in the first game, and may be other information as long as the information can identify the effect executed in the first game. That is, the effect executed in the first game, such as information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect executed in the first game, and the address information of the memory in which the effect executed in the first game is stored. Any information that can be called again is sufficient.

After memorizing the effect executed in the first game time, the game time (second game time) that is executed after the first game time and is won by the jackpot lottery is specified by the pre-judgment process. Then, the memorized advance notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, by setting the fluctuation time to be the same for all the game times won in the jackpot lottery, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be set to the second. It can be executed within the fluctuation time in the game times.

In addition, when the preceding game times exist between the first game times and the second game times, the present embodiment is realized by executing the suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game times. can do. Further, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestion effect corresponding to each fluctuation time may be executed in each preceding game time, and for example, the preceding game time executed immediately before the second game time may be executed. The suggestion effect may be executed only in, and the normal effect may be executed in other preceding game times.

Further, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and when a plurality of preceding game times are continuously present between the first game time and the second game time, the first game time is used. An upper limit of the number of game times allowed as the preceding game times between the second game times may be set.

FIG. 46B is a time chart illustrating an example of processing in the case where a plurality of preceding game times are continuously present between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, when there are 5 or less preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of order after winning the big hit lottery in the first game time (FIG. 46 (b). )) After that, in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, a game round reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game round is executed, and there are 6 or more preceding game rounds. (Not shown), and then, in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, the game round reproduction effect may not be executed. As the process, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect executed in the first game round (this embodiment) is the same as the process executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307). In, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect) are stored in the sound / light side RAM 94.

In addition, a preceding game times counter that counts the number of preceding game times between the first game times and the second game times is provided, and when deciding the production of the second game times to win the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game times counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game time is read from the sound / light side RAM 94, and in the second game time, the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. The reproduction effect is executed, and when the counter value is 6 or more, the effect at the time of a normal big hit is executed in the second game round. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. In addition, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round. Specifically, it is determined that the preceding game times immediately before the second game time are specified by the pre-determination process, and the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game times is determined, the suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of the preceding game times is selected and executed. By doing so, even when a plurality of preceding game times are continuously present between the first game time and the second game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed. can. In this explanation, if there are 6 or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of the preceding game times after the first game time won in the big hit lottery. After that, it was decided that the game times reproduction effect would not be executed in the second game times in which the jackpot lottery was won, but the number of preceding game times (threshold value) determined not to execute the game times reproduction effect is limited to 6. Can be set to any number.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the other game times. By executing the suggestion effect at the time, the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Further, even if a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) exist between the first game time and the second game time, a suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time is produced. By executing this, it is possible to execute the game time reproduction effect in the second game time without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

C. Third Embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart illustrating the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, at least a part of the effects executed in the game times before the first game time (FIG. 48: first preceding game time) is reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect. At the same time, a case where at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced will be described. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case c1 and case c2, as examples.

FIG. 48 (a) shows, as case c1, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is not won in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates the process to be executed by. As shown in the figure, before the first game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game and the first game. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect that announces that the jackpot lottery will be won in the first game round. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big hit is announced as a result notification effect.

The result notification effect in the first preceding game round when the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. The symbol variation display and the stop display are executed in the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a. .. Specifically, in the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed during the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, continuous production is executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a series of continuous effects from the first preceding game times to the first game times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 48A, after executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special gaming state.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are reproduced and executed. do. When the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the content of the symbol to be displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed is actually displayed in the first game round. The contents of the design are partially different.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end effect after executing a special game state reproduction effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is out of the question. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal advance notice effect and a result notification effect (disengagement notification).

Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48 (b) will be described. In case c2, as in case c1, before the first game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order. Further, in case c2, before the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, there is a second preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order.

Similar to the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game times and the first game times. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big hit is announced as a result notification effect.

After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special gaming state.

In the case of case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. Then, the game time reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game time and the second game time. In case c2, as the game round reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

After the end of the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect of the special gaming state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game round, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

The third embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following specific processing.

In the present embodiment, the effect executed in the four game times already executed is always stored in the RAM 96. Then, each time a prize is generated in the first starting port 33, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times executed by the prize is grasped by the pre-determination process.

As a result of the pre-determination process, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round, which is held one before the first game round, is held. If the result is out of order, the continuous effect is executed over the first preceding game and the first game.

Then, when there are two or more reserved game times after the first game time by the end of the first game time, the result of the big hit lottery of the two game times is grasped by the pre-determination process. Case c1 is executed when the results of the jackpot lottery of the two game times are both consecutively out of order. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state that is executed after the first game round.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times executed earlier is out of the two game times and the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times executed later is a jackpot, case c2 is executed. .. That is, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time, and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game time and the second game time.

In case c2, when the second preceding game times do not exist, that is, when the big hit lottery in the game times executed after the special game state after the first game times is a big hit, the second game times In, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game times to the first game times may be executed as the game times reproduction effect. In this case, if the fluctuation time of the second game is shorter than the time required to reproduce all of the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the continuous production is executed from the game times before the first game time to the first game time. However, the continuous effect can be reproduced as a special game state reproduction effect and a game time reproduction effect. Further, by using the processing of the case c1 and the case c2 together, the player's attention to the continuous production can be improved.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart illustrating the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game time in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order is executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time executed after the first game time. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case d1 and case d2, as examples.

In FIG. 49 (a), as case d1, the pachinko machine 10 loses the jackpot lottery in the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. Indicates the process to be executed. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game round. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 makes a miss notification in the result notification effect.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game time reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. As a suggestion effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, and as a game round reproduction effect, a notice effect and reach executed in the first game round. Perform the production. In addition, a big hit will be announced as a result announcement effect.

After executing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect as an opening effect. Further, as the ending effect, a normal ending effect is executed.

Next, the case d2 will be described. Case d2 is a case where, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the jackpot lottery is lost in the first game round, and further, the jackpot lottery is lost in the second game round executed after the first game round. , The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 is shown. As shown in the figure, in the first game round, the advance notice effect and the reach effect are executed. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 makes a miss notification in the result notification effect.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game time reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. As a suggestion effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, and as a game round reproduction effect, a notice effect and reach executed in the first game round. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification production, a missed notification is performed.

The fourth embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following specific processing.

By executing the pre-determination process every time a prize is won in the first starting port 33, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the reserved game times is successful. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times held two or more earlier is won, the game times won in the jackpot lottery (corresponding to the second game times in case d1). The advance notice effect and reach effect are executed in the game times (corresponding to the first game time) held immediately before the above, and the executed advance notice effect and reach effect are memorized. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed notice effect and reach effect itself, but may be other information as long as the executed notice effect and reach effect can be read again. good.

After executing the reach effect in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 performs a miss notification as a result notification effect. After that, in the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed, and the memorized advance notice effect and reach effect are executed as the game time reproduction effect. Further, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game round is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the voice emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. By executing such a process, the case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized.

Further, in case d2, when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order by executing the first determination process, the case d2 is executed first of the two reserved game times. It can be realized by executing the reach effect in the game times to be executed, and reproducing the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect and the reach effect executed in the previous game times as the game times reproduction effect in the game times to be executed later. .. In this case, in the second game time, the fluctuation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, for example, a part or all of the advance notice effect to be executed as the game time reproduction effect may be omitted according to the fluctuation time of the second game time.

On the other hand, in the second game time, when the fluctuation time of the second game time is longer than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. For example, the execution time of the suggestion effect may be set to be long according to the fluctuation time of the second game. It is necessary for the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect by preparing multiple types of suggestion effects corresponding to the time required for the effect and selecting the optimum suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of the second game time. The time can be the same as the fluctuation time of the second game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot lottery related to the second game is won by executing the process of case d1. Since the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order is executed in the second game round as the game round reproduction effect, the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. It is difficult for the player to expect that. In addition, by executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the effect in the first game time, which is out of the jackpot lottery, is reproduced before the game time reproduction effect is executed, in the second game time, the first game is executed. It is possible to give the player more recognition that the effect executed in the times is only reproduced. Then, only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round has been won, so that the game is surprising. Gender can be imparted. That is, by making the second game time an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, by executing the process of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is also out of order. Since the game time reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the lottery result of the big hit lottery related to the game time in which the game time reproduction effect is executed is not necessarily a big hit. As a result, when the game time reproduction effect is executed, the player is given an inflection of feelings and a sense of expectation, and the player's attention to the game time in which the already executed effect is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth Embodiment (Example of setting process of production type):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of the process executed in the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game times in the voice emission control device 90 (sound light side MPU 92). In this description, first, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the effect type setting process. When the sound / light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter for object C are used to determine the content of the advance notice effect. A counter value is acquired from each random number counter of C13 at a predetermined timing.

The display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 are random number counters used to determine how to combine a plurality of object images constituting the advance notice effect in each game. The display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 are configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

In the present embodiment, the advance notice effect in each game is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display mode of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, how to combine these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the display timing are determined and set as a notice effect. Here, three types of object images constituting the advance notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A, which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows a state of movement of a character representing a person, and is composed of three images, an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. 51 (a) shows image A1, FIG. 51 (b) shows image A2, and FIG. 51 (c) shows image A3. The object A is an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, image A2, and image A3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object A is displayed as an object image of a moving image, and a case where the object A is displayed as an object image of a moving image. One of the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B, which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 52 (a) shows image B1, FIG. 52 (b) shows image B2, and FIG. 52 (c) shows image B3. The object B is an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, image B2, and image B3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object B is displayed as an object image of a moving image, and a case where the object B is displayed as an object image of a moving image. One of the images B1, the image B2, and the image B3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C, which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the movement of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images, an image C1, an image C2, and an image C3. FIG. 53 (a) shows image C1, FIG. 53 (b) shows image C2, and FIG. 53 (c) shows image C3. The object C is an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, image C2, and image C3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object C is displayed as an object image of a moving image, and a case where the object C is displayed as an object image of a moving image. One of the images C1, the image C2, and the image C3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

The description returns to FIG. When the sound light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from each display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, it refers to the display pattern table for object A, the display pattern table for object B, and the display pattern table for object C, and each display pattern random number counter. The collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed, and the display pattern is determined for each object.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for object A has a big hit when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit and when the result of the big hit lottery is wrong and the reach effect is executed (“missing (with reach)”). It is divided into three cases when the result of the lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed (“out of reach (no reach”)), and for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 As shown in FIG. 54, as a display pattern of the object A, a pattern in which the object A is not displayed (non-display) and a pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed (a pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed) are associated with the display pattern. A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for displaying the image A1 and the image A2 in order, and a pattern (A1-A2-A3) for displaying the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 in order are set in advance.

When setting the advance notice effect in a predetermined game time, the sound light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game time corresponds to a big hit, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). Then, in the display pattern table, the corresponding part of the game times is referred to. For example, when the game is a big hit, the "big hit" column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by collating with the value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C11.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the method of allocating the random number value to each display pattern is different in each case of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed when it is a big hit, how often it is displayed when it is off (with reach), and how often it is displayed when it is off (without reach). Is different. That is, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed is higher in the order of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). On the contrary, the probability that the display pattern (A1) is displayed is higher in the order of deviation (without reach), deviation (with reach), and jackpot. Therefore, in the advance notice effect in the game round, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed is higher than the case where only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) Is set so that the probability of a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. That is, the effect by the object A indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, the degree of expectation). Also called), it functions as a step-up effect.

In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different in the method of allocating the random number values in each case of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). The expectation of the jackpot shown by the step-up effect of the object A, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object B, and the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object C are different from each other. For example, in object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for object B is not displayed in the game times when it is out (without reach), but is displayed in the case of out (with reach) and jackpot. It may be sorted. Specifically, in the display pattern for object B, in the case of deviation (no reach), it can be realized by setting it to "hidden" in all cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing so, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed can be made different from the expectation of the jackpot when the object A and the object B are displayed. That is, in each of the display pattern tables of object A, object B, and object C, the random number values are distributed differently in each of the jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach) cases. In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be expressed by the presence or absence of display of each object. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

In addition, in this embodiment, each display pattern table of object A, object B, and object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), and each display pattern random number. For example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of object B is further divided into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, and the effect by object B is expected to be the probability variation jackpot. It may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which there is a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode), the effect by the object C is the expected degree of the probability change state of the current game times. It may function as a step-up effect indicating. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function of suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, a jackpot expectation degree or a jackpot expectation degree). You may indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game (such as the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 50, the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display pattern for the objects A, B, and C, and then arranges the objects in order to combine the objects and display them on the display surface 41a. Set the position and the display timing of each object. Specifically, the sound / light side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position and display timing of each object with reference to a preset arrangement / timing setting table.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement / timing setting table. As shown in the figure, the arrangement / timing setting table starts displaying the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each displayed object, and the display surface 41a of each object. The timing is set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the processing using the random number counter is, for example, the display pattern (A1-A2) for the object A, the display pattern (hidden) for the object B, and the display pattern (C1-C2-) for the object C. In the case of C3), the displayed objects are the object A and the object C, so refer to "AC" in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table. Then, in this case, as shown in the middle column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement coordinates of the object A and the object C are such that the center coordinates of the object A are located on (Xa2, Ya2) of the display surface 41a for the object A. The object C is set so as to be displayed so that the center coordinates of the object C are located on (Xc1, Yc1) of the display surface 41a. Further, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the display of the object A is started 2 seconds after the start of the game round, and the display of the object C is started after the start of the game round. It is set to start displaying after tk 1 second.

Although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period is displayed. The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as not to overlap each other.

In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the display surface 41a is such that the objects are related to each other. The arrangement of display objects (relative arrangement position between objects) and the display start timing (relative timing between objects) in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as to be displayed in. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period do not overlap each other.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a preview effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. In the example of FIG. 56, the case where the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 change with time is shown. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), and FIG. 56 (c). FIG. 56 shows a notice effect in which object A, object B, and object C are combined, a display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for object A, and a display pattern (B1-B2) is displayed for object B. -B3) is displayed, and for the object C, a notice effect set so that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed is shown.

In the preview production shown in Fig. 56, a story is told that a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog in the box while the weather is getting worse, and gives the dog an umbrella. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the display objects are displayed on the display surface 41a in a narrative manner. By doing so, it is possible to make the advance notice effect executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period as an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and by having a story, the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner in which there is no image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and a process of displaying only a layer image showing a character representing a person. Is being executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the effect of displaying a plurality of object images a natural effect for the player.

In FIG. 56, the process of not displaying the image frame is executed only for the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3), The image frame A2 and a part or all of the image A3 may not be displayed. Further, the same processing may be executed for other object images.

In this way, the sound light side MPU 92 sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object, and sets the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect type setting process described above will be described with a flowchart.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

In step S3201, the counter values are acquired from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, respectively. After that, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is set is a big hit, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, the display patterns of the objects are determined by referring to the display pattern tables for the objects A to C. Then, the process proceeds to step S3204.

In step S3204, when a display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the advance notice effect of the game times. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all the objects A to C are "hidden".

In step S3204, if it is determined that the object display is not absent (non-display) in the advance notice effect in the game round (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, and the arrangement / timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object and the timing to start displaying on the display surface 41a are determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S3206.

On the other hand, in step S3204, if it is determined that there is no object display (non-display) in the advance notice effect of the game times (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing at which the display of each object is started are set in the advance notice effect in the game round. Then, the process proceeds to step S3207.

In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game is a big hit or a miss (with reach). That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect after executing the advance notice effect in the game times.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the game number is a big hit or a miss (with reach) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208, and the reach effect setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game number is not a big hit or a miss (with reach) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

In step S3209, the advance notice effect and reach effect set in step S3206 and step S3208 are set in the effect command. After that, the setting process of the effect type is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the objects are displayed in the same period as the advance notice effect, they are displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner related to each other, so that the objects are the same. The effect executed by being displayed during the period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object may be displayed in the same period as other objects, or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone), so multiple types of objects may be used. The effect can be executed and the object can be effectively used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, the plurality of object images are displayed in a manner having a narrative property in relation to each other, so that the plurality of object images are displayed in the same period. It is possible to make the effect executed by being displayed on the player a natural effect for the player. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having a narrative character in the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the objects A, the object B, and the object C are different in the method of allocating the random numbers in each case of the jackpot, the miss (with reach), and the miss (without reach). The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game and the degree of expectation of the jackpot shown by the step-up effect by each object image of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed in the same period. Expectations can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting mode of the display pattern table, for example, the classification of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is divided into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot. By classifying into jackpots, the effect by the object B can function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot. That is, the effect of each object can function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when each object image is displayed in the same period, the relative positions between the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the arrangement / timing is such that the objects are related. The arrangement of display objects in the setting table and the timing of display start are set. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, there are cases where each object image is displayed in the same period and cases where it is not displayed in the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone), so a plurality of effects are executed using each object image. It is possible to make effective use of object images.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A has a display pattern (A1), a display pattern (A1-A2), and a display pattern (A1-A2-A3). ) May be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, the relative positions with respect to other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, since the relative positions between the object images are displayed on the display surface 41a at predetermined arrangement positions according to each of the plurality of different display modes (display patterns), each object is displayed in each display mode. Images are not displayed superimposed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects executed by displaying each object image in the same period can improve the quality of the effects without giving a complicated impression to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing at which the display of each object is started on the display surface 41a is preset by the arrangement / timing setting table. Therefore, when each object image is displayed in the same period, it is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing among the object images, so that each object image is displayed at a timing that is not related at all. Never. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image that changes with time (moving image in the present embodiment), various effects can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery when the object A is displayed as a notice effect, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery when the object B is displayed as a notice effect, and the object C. Is displayed as a notice effect, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is different from each other. Further, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery when each object image is combined and displayed as a notice effect is also different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

F. Sixth Embodiment (Other example of effect type setting process):
Next, as a sixth embodiment, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described. As described above, the effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game times in the voice emission control device 90 (sound light side MPU 92). In this description, first, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above is a method of determining the type of object to be displayed as a notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined by the display pattern random numbers and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of types of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is preset by the display object table, and the sound / light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays the counter value. By collating with the object table, the combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position and the display start timing of the objects displayed in the notice effect are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table, but in the present embodiment, each of the combinations of the displayed objects is determined. The placement position of each object and the display start timing are set in advance according to the display pattern of. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When the sound / light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the sound / light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes collation with the counter value of the acquired display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the advance notice effect. Determine the combination.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display object table. As shown in the figure, the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and the combination of each object to be displayed as a notice effect are set in association with each other in the display object table. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as the object images displayed in the advance notice effect. The display object table in the present embodiment differs in the method of allocating the value of the display object random number (the number of values to be allocated) for each combination of objects displayed as a notice effect. For example, when only the object A is displayed as the display object, the value of the display object random number is 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. When the object A and the object B are displayed, the value of the display object random number is 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the values of the display object random numbers are 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. In this way, the frequency with which each combination of objects is displayed as a notice effect differs due to the difference in the number of allotted display object random number values for each combination of objects.

The description returns to FIG. When the sound / light side MPU 92 determines the combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect, the sound / light side MPU 92 then acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of display objects and collates with the counter value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C22. Is executed to determine the display pattern corresponding to the combination of the display objects. FIG. 58 shows a case where the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table determine that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of the objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. In this case, the sound / light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases: jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed (non-display), the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C are combined. A pattern to be displayed (A1 / C1), a pattern to display the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A in order, and a pattern to display the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C (A1-A2 / C1-C2), the image of the object A. A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set in which A1 and the image A2 are displayed in order, and the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C are displayed in order. Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the display start timing are set in advance for each display pattern, and the display pattern is determined to determine the display pattern of each object in the advance notice effect. The placement position and display start timing are determined.

For example, when the game is a big hit and it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of the objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. When the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), and 54 (c). As shown in the figure, in the advance notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed in order. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) includes the arrangement position and display start timing of the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A, and the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C. Since the arrangement position and the display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the advance notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

Although the AC display pattern table has been described in FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. Further, for each display pattern table, a plurality of types of display patterns are set by combining images of each object.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for A. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), each of them is hidden, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), and display pattern (A1). -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are assigned to the four display patterns. As shown in the figure, in the case of the display pattern table for A, the display pattern (A1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (without reach), and in the case of deviation (with reach). The display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counters C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that they are displayed more frequently. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player can display the image A2 on the display surface 41a after that, rather than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the jackpot lottery have increased, and when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the jackpot lottery is performed more than when the image A2 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning will increase.

Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B. In the case of the display pattern table for B, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), respectively. Four display patterns (B1) (see FIG. 52) are assigned. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for B is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and the display pattern table is out of reach (reach). In the case of Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) is the most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counters C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that they are displayed more frequently. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the above-mentioned advance notice effect by the object A, the player can perform the image B1 after the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered, and the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lower than when the image B2 is displayed after the image B1 on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lower.

Next, the display pattern table for C will be described.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for C. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of jackpot, off (with reach), and off (without reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), and display pattern (C1), respectively. -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are assigned to the four display patterns. As shown in the figure, in the case of deviation (without reach), the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of deviation (with reach), the above four displays are displayed. Of the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. As described above, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player can see when the image C2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, rather than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the jackpot lottery have increased, and when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the jackpot lottery is performed more than when the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning will increase.

Next, the display pattern table for AB will be described.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for AB. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), each of them is hidden, display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3), and display pattern (A1). -A2-A3 / B1) and display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are assigned to four display patterns. As shown in the figure, when the AB display pattern table is out of alignment (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. , In the case of off (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, it is displayed among the above four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counters C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that the patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are displayed most frequently.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66 (a), FIG. 66 (b), and FIG. 66 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses how a walking person gets wet with rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rain.

When the image consisting of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 66A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it is not given, the player is not given an unfavorable perception of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. This gives the impression that it is generally not good to compare with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a), and gives the player an advantage in terms of the game situation as compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a). Gives an unspeakable perception. When the image consisting of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who gets wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression. Gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) changes the recognition of the game situation to the disadvantageous recognition for the player as the display of the advance notice effect progresses.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67 (a), FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 67 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice production shows that the walking person notices that it is sunny and is holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

When the image consisting of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it is not given, the player is not given an unfavorable perception of the situation of the game. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who notices that it is sunny, and the image also includes the image. Similar to the image of FIG. 67 (a), since it generally does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when an image consisting of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person holding an umbrella to take measures against sunburn, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression and gives a non-disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to judge whether the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the display of the notice effect progresses.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 68 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows that while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy, a walking person notices the change in the weather and is able to appropriately respond to the deterioration of the weather by holding an umbrella. Is expressed.

When the image consisting of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it is not given, the player is not given an unfavorable perception of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. In general, it gives an impression that the image shown in FIG. 68 (a) cannot be compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a). Gives recognition that cannot be said. After that, when an image consisting of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image is represented by a person who can appropriately respond to the deterioration of the weather by holding an umbrella. It gives a good impression in general and gives a favorable perception of the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player recognition in the image of FIG. 68 (a) that is not disadvantageous regarding the situation of the game, and then. In the image of FIG. 68 (b), the player is given a non-advantageous perception of the game situation, and then in the image of FIG. 68 (c), the player is given an advantageous perception of the game situation. .. By displaying such a notice effect, it is possible to give an intonation to the player's expectation for the game.

As shown in FIGS. 66, 67, and 68, the effect set by the display pattern table for AB gives the player a recognition that the situation of the game is advantageous or disadvantageous as the advance notice effect progresses. It is configured to give. In particular, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 and the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 68 are compared. , FIG. 66 (a) and FIG. 68 (a) are the same images, FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 68 (b) are the same images, and both of the notice effects are the same images up to the middle. , It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether the advance notice effect of FIG. 66 or the advance notice effect of FIG. 68 is changed. More specifically, a person who notices a change in the weather can give the player a sense of urgency in response to a change such as whether or not to hold an umbrella at the end, and the player's attention to the notice production can be increased. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the display pattern table for BC will be described.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for BC. In the case of the display pattern table for BC, in the three cases of jackpot, off (with reach), and off (without reach), non-display, display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3), and display pattern (B2-B3), respectively. / C1-C3) and display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3) are assigned to four display patterns. As shown in the figure, in the case of the BC display pattern table being out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and is out of alignment. In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is displayed among the above four display patterns (with reach). The values of the display pattern random number counters C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that B1 / C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70 (a), FIG. 70 (b), and FIG. 70 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows that the weather changes from cloudy to rain, while the dog appears from inside the box and the dog gets wet in the rain.

When the image consisting of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the box is placed in the cloudy weather, and is generally expressed. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. However, after that, when an image consisting of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog with a large face from the box gets wet with rain. Is expressed, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game when the image of FIG. 70 (c) is displayed.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows that the weather changes from cloudy to rain and that the box is placed in such weather.

When the image consisting of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the box is placed in the cloudy weather, and is generally expressed. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. When the image consisting of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image has not changed from the image in FIG. 71 (b), and the image is also a game. No disadvantageous perception of the game situation is given to the person. As described above, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), and FIG. 72 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice production shows a dog appearing out of the box on a sunny day.

When the image consisting of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the box is placed in the sunny weather, and is generally expressed. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image B1 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 72B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows the dog appearing from the box in the sunny weather. This gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation as compared to FIG. 72 (a). When the notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, it is more likely that the big hit lottery will be won if the notice effect changes from image C1 to image C2 and image C3. Also in the notice effect by the object B and the object C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), the image by the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. After that, when the image consisting of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog makes a large face out of the box in the sunny weather. In general, it gives a good impression, so it gives the player an advantageous perception of the situation of the game. As described above, in the effect of the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3), the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3, and the other Since the image that gives a bad impression to the player is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game as the advance notice effect progresses.

Here, among the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. 71 -The comparison with the notice production by C3) will be described.

These two notice effects are the same image up to the image in the middle. Specifically, FIGS. 70 (a) and 71 (a) are the same images, and FIGS. 70 (b) and 71 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of these two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle of the process. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player differs greatly between the two advance notice effects. The image of FIG. 70 (c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and the image of the dog getting wet in the rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. Gives a disadvantageous perception of. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 71 (c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image in which the box is placed in the rain does not give a bad impression to the player. On the other hand, it does not give a disadvantageous recognition about the situation of the game. In other words, when an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed and the image C1 is subsequently changed to the image C3, the image is shown in FIG. 70 (c), so that the player On the other hand, if the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed and the image C1 does not change thereafter, the case is concerned. Since the image is shown in FIG. 71 (c), the player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. Therefore, by executing the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, the game is to determine whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and give the player a sense of urgency.

In the advance notice effect by the display pattern table for C of FIG. 64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is more than the case where the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Is displayed on the display surface 41a to give the player a more advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. Specifically, the image of the dog appearing inside the box generally gives a better impression than the image of the box being placed. Give the player a favorable perception of the game situation. Further, when the notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, it is more likely that the big hit lottery will be won if the notice effect changes from image C1 to image C2 and image C3. When the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3, the situation of the game is further described to the player than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Gives a favorable perception.

However, when the image B3 is combined with the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 is better when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 71 (c)). It gives the player a more favorable perception of the game situation than when it is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 70 (c)).

That is, when the image B3 (rain image) is not combined with each of the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 (inside the box) is more than when the image C1 (box image) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Image B3 (rain image) is given to each of image C1 and image C3 when the dog image) is displayed on the display surface 41a, although it gives the player a more favorable perception of the game situation. ) Is combined, the case where the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a is larger than the case where the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Give the player a favorable perception of the game situation.

Therefore, depending on how the images are combined, it is possible to give the player various perceptions about the situation of the game. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with the production image that steps up as the probability and expectation of winning the jackpot lottery are higher, the player has a completely different perception of the game situation. Can be given to. Even when the player recognizes the image C1 (image of the box) and the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, whether or not the image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. Recognize that the game situation is different depending on the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a.

Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image of the box) is displayed as compared with the image C3 (image of rain) as compared with the case where the image C1 (image of the box) is not combined with the image B3 (image of rain). When the image of the dog in the box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (image of rain), the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed even though the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher. The jackpot lottery was won when the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) was displayed in combination with the image B3 (rain image) than when the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) was displayed in combination with the image B3 (rain image). There is a high probability that it is. Therefore, when an image of object C or a part thereof such as image C1 (image of a box) or image C3 (image of a dog in a box) is displayed, whether or not image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. It is possible to improve the attention of the player.

Normally, the higher the step-up (for example, the more the production image progresses from image P1 → image P2 → image P3), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot lottery. P3 is configured to give an image that gives a better impression to the player. That is, in the image P1, the image P2, and the image P3, the order of high and low probability of winning the big hit lottery and the order of good or bad impression given to the player are aligned. With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved as the effect image is stepped up (progressed). By combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image, [image P1 + image Q], [image P2 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] are displayed. Even so, [Image P2 + Image Q] is better than [Image P1 + Image Q], and [Image P3 + Image Q] is better than [Image P2 + Image Q]. It is composed of. That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, the [image P2 + image Q] gives the player more than the [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image to be displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the image to be combined. In the present embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3, and the image Q, the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, but the image Q is combined. In this case, [Image P2 + Image Q] makes it possible to give a better impression to the player than [Image P3 + Image Q].

By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. That is, in the effect image that is not combined with the image Q, it is given that the game situation is more advantageous as the process progresses from image P1 → image P2 → image P3, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, [image P1 + image] It becomes possible to give the recognition that the situation of the game is disadvantageous as the progress of Q] → [image P2 + image Q] → [image P3 + image Q].

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for ABC. In the case of the display pattern table for ABC, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), each is hidden and display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3). ), Display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3), and display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3). There is. As shown in the figure, when the ABC display pattern table is out of alignment (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is the most among the above four display patterns. The frequency of display is high, and in the case of deviation (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and is a big hit. In the case of, the display patterns 0 to 99 are displayed so that the display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns. The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

Next, the display pattern table for AC will be described.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 74 (b), and FIG. 74 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses how a person walking and a dog appearing out of the box get wet in the rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rain. There is.

When an image consisting of the image A1, the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person and a box in a sunny day, and is generally represented. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 74B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and the person changes in the weather. Along with noticing, the appearance of the dog appearing slightly from the box is expressed, and the image also does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. However, after that, when an image consisting of the image A2, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 74 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image includes the person who noticed the change in the weather and the inside of the box. It expresses how a dog with a big face gets wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives an intonation to the player's expectation for the game, and at the end of the advance notice effect, to the player. , Gives a disadvantageous perception of the game situation.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75 (a), FIG. 75 (b), and FIG. 75 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows a person who notices the change in the weather and a dog appearing from the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

When the image consisting of the image A1, the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 75 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking and a box placed in the sunny weather. Is expressed and generally does not give a bad impression, so it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 75B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the change in the weather is noticed in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy. It depicts a person and a dog appearing slightly from inside the box, and the image also does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. When the image consisting of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog who greatly appears from the box are expressed in the cloudy weather. , The image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76 (a), FIG. 76 (b), and FIG. 76 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses how a walking person notices the change in the weather and puts an umbrella on the dog who appears from the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rain. Has been done.

When the image consisting of the image A1, the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking and a box placed in the sunny weather. Is expressed and generally does not give a bad impression, so it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 76B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the change in the weather is noticed in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy. It depicts a person and a dog appearing slightly from inside the box, and the image also does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Then, when the image consisting of the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 76C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog with a large face out of the box in the rain and the dog with an umbrella The person to be mentioned is expressed, and the image generally gives a moving impression, so that the player is given an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game.

Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 74 and the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 are shown. A comparison with the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) will be described.

These two notice effects are the same image up to the image in the middle. Specifically, FIGS. 74 (a) and 76 (a) are the same images, and FIGS. 74 (b) and 76 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of these two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle of the process. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player differs greatly between the two advance notice effects. The image of FIG. 74 (c) is an image in which image A2, image B3, and image B3 are combined, and an image in which a person and a dog get wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression to the player. On the other hand, it gives a disadvantageous perception about the situation of the game. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 76 (c) is an image in which image A3, image B3, and image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person holds an umbrella so that the dog does not get wet in the rain. Is an image that gives a good impression, so it gives the player an advantageous perception of the situation of the game. In other words, if an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed and the image A2 does not change thereafter, the image is shown in FIG. 74 (c). , Gives the player an unfavorable perception of the situation of the game, while displaying an image in which image A2, image B2 and image C2 are combined, and then image A2 becomes image A3. In the case of the change to, since the image is shown in FIG. 76 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. Therefore, whether or not the image A2 is changed to the image A3 by executing the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 76 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined. In addition to being able to attract the attention of the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency.

Further, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

In the advance notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 above, the effect image progresses because it is expressed that the weather is getting worse as the effect images progress with the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3. As a result, the player is given a disadvantageous perception of the situation of the game. Further, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 is set, the probability that the big hit lottery is won is set lower when the notice effect changes from image B1 to image B2 and image B3. Therefore, as the effect images such as the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 progress, the player is further given a disadvantageous recognition of the situation of the game. That is, the object B gives the player a disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3.

However, the object B is combined with the object A in which the image progresses in the order of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3, and the object C in which the image progresses in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2-). By displaying it as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the production image to have a content that impresses the player, and it is advantageous for the player regarding the situation of the game. It can be transformed into an image that gives recognition. As described above, each image configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment is displayed as one object or in combination with other objects by devising the contents of the image. Depending on the case, the impression given by the image can be greatly changed, and the perception of the game situation given to the player can be greatly changed.

In the present embodiment, the advance notice effect by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or the advance notice effect consisting of a combination thereof is used as an effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. That is, although these advance notice effects are used as effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot, they may be used as the effects of indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot and the degree of expectation of being in the probability change state to the player. Also in this case, as in the present embodiment, the player can be given a recognition that the situation of the game is advantageous or a disadvantage depending on how the images of the objects are combined.

Next, the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with a flowchart.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect type in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

In step S3301, the counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the process proceeds to step S3302, the display object table is referred to, the counter value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is collated, and the combination of objects to be displayed as the advance notice effect is determined. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, the counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process proceeds to step S3304, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is set is a big hit, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of objects to be displayed as the advance notice effect is referred to, the counter value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C22 is collated, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, and the determined display pattern is set as the advance notice effect. After executing step S3306, the process proceeds to step S3307.

In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game is a big hit. If it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is a big hit (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, it is determined whether or not the display pattern of the advance notice effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern means that the combination of objects displayed as a notice effect is object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-). B3 / C1-C2-C3) refers to a display pattern. That is, it refers to the display pattern shown in FIG. 56. If it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the advance notice effect is the full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

In step S3309, as the reach effect setting process, the reach effect executed after the advance notice effect of the full display pattern is set to the sequel effect expressing the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), and FIG. 78 (c). As shown in the figure, the sequel production is a production that shows a person walking with a dog under his umbrella in the rain. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to show the player that the probability of being a big hit is high and improve the player's expectation.

The description returns to FIG. 77. After setting the sequel effect as the reach effect in step S3309, the process proceeds to step S3310.

If it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the game times are reach, that is, whether or not the game is out of reach (with reach). When it is determined in step S3311 that the game times are reach (S3311: YES), or when it is determined that the display pattern of the advance notice effect set in step S3308 is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO). The process proceeds to step S3312.

In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the reach effect setting process. Then, the process proceeds to step S3310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3311 that the game times are not reach (S3311: NO), the process proceeds to step S3310 without executing step S3312.

In step S3310, the advance notice effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set in the effect command. After that, the effect type setting process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the perception of advantages / disadvantages regarding the game situation given to the player depending on how each object is combined, so that various effects using each object are executed. It is possible to make effective use of each object image. For example, even if object A is displayed, it is advantageous for the game situation given to the player depending on how it is combined with other objects or whether it is displayed in the same period as other objects. Since the recognition of disadvantages is different, it is possible to perform various effects using each object image, and each object image can be effectively used. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed differs for each of the various display patterns consisting of the combination of each object image, the player's attention to the effect composed of each display pattern, It is possible to improve the degree of interest and expectation.

Further, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, jackpot, miss (with reach), miss (without reach)). By adjusting the arrangement position, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the timing for starting the display of each object is changed is set according to the situation of the game, so that the timing for starting the display of each object can be adjusted. , It is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh Embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described first to sixth embodiments is that the voice emission control device 90 is provided with an RTC96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information. be. The RTC96 is provided with a backup power supply, and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 acquires the date information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC effect which is an effect based on the acquired date information and the time information. In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition, and if it determines that the time information matches, the RTC effect is performed. Start the process to execute. The RTC production of the present embodiment is composed of a 300-second RTC production video and RTC production music corresponding to the RTC production video, and is executed at 00:00 every hour.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in progress flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect is started, and is turned off when the RTC effect is finished.

When the time is set to 00 minutes every hour and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display control device 100 sets the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the background. The mode of displaying the moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1). At the same time, while maintaining the audio output level (volume) preset by the player, the output is started from the temporal head position "01" of the RTC directed music.

When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image has expired (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 on the RTC effect moving image. The mode shifts from the mode to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed. Then, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal top position "01" of the background moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t2), the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal beginning position "01" of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound.

The voice emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and when executing a background music cueing process (a process of starting output or display from the temporal start position "01"). , The type of background music to be cueed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music and is selected. A background video corresponding to the background music may be selected and the cueing process may be executed. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of background music and background moving images can be viewed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In FIG. 83, which will be described later, similarly, when the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the cueing process of the background music and the background moving image, the background music and the background moving image are selected from a plurality of types. Can be adopted.

FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo moving image.

When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as a demo video. The mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the voice emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the start position "01", and the audio output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image has expired (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 on the RTC effect moving image. The mode shifts from the mode to the mode in which the demo video is displayed. Then, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal top position "01" of the demo moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image (time t2), the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and the voice output level (time t2). Volume) is reduced to 0.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As the transition condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, and the audio output mode is shifted to the mode of zero volume (silence state). It is a condition.

When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display control device 100 sets the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background moving image. Is shifted from the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1). At the same time, while maintaining the audio output level (volume) preset by the player, the output is started from the temporal head position "01" of the RTC directed music.

In the display control device 100, while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image, the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is stopped (time t2), and 15 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the symbol was stopped. When (time t3) is established, after the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image is completed, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Shift (time t4). Then, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal top position "01" of the demo moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image (time t4), the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and the voice output level (time t4). Volume) is reduced to 0.

FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As for the return condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound output mode is such that the background music is output at a preset volume. It is a condition to return to the aspect.

When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as a demo video. The mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the voice emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the start position "01", and the audio output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image and the symbol change on the main display unit 45 starts and the return condition is satisfied (time t2), the display control device 100 determines the RTC effect moving image in advance. After the display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) is completed, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the voice emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal beginning position "01" of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) executed in the sound-light side MPU of the first embodiment is that the standby state transition processing (step S1803) is executed after the command correspondence processing (step S1802) is executed. The point is that the RTC effect processing (step S1802a) is executed before the operation, and the other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment. In the RTC effect processing, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON. The RTC effect during effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effecting flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the process proceeds to step S3402, and the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches the hourly 00 minutes. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not match the time set in advance as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: NO), the RTC effect process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, the RTC effect time setting process is executed. Specifically, "150,000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, the RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts the process for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406.

In step S3406, the output start processing of the RTC production music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal beginning position of the RTC directed music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped and the output is started from the temporal beginning position of the RTC production music. After that, the process proceeds to step S3407, and the RTC effecting flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S3408.

In step S3408, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image display flag is ON. The situation where any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON means that the above-mentioned transition conditions are satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. Means. If it is determined in step S3408 that any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display display flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

In step S3409, the reduced audio output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. After that, the process proceeds to step S3410, and the demo video start flag is turned ON after the RTC effect. The demo video start flag after RTC production is a flag for starting the demo video after the RTC production is finished, and the transition condition is satisfied before the start of the RTC production or during the execution of the RTC production. Is a flag that is turned on when is satisfied. After executing step S3410, the process proceeds to step S3411 to turn off the ON flag among the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display display flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display display flag are all OFF (S3408: NO), the processes of steps S3409 to S3411 are executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S3412.

In step S3412, it is determined whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, the demo video start flag is turned off after the RTC effect, and the process proceeds to step S3414 to satisfy the return condition. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition establishment flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the RTC effect processing is terminated as it is without executing the processes of step S3413 and step S3414.

If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect in-progress flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, if the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

In step S3415, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the RTC effect ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is 0. If it is determined in step S3415 that it is the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and the process proceeds to the process when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414 described above. The reason for this is that the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period during which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processes of steps S3408 to S3414.

In step S3416, the RTC effecting flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S3417 to execute the RTC production music output stop processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S3418.

In step S3418, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start flag is ON after the RTC effect. If it is determined in step S3418 that the demo moving image start flag is not ON after the RTC effect (S3418: NO), the process proceeds to step S3419, and the background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving the background moving image start command, the display side MPU 102 starts a process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal beginning position. After that, the process proceeds to step S3420 to execute the background music output start process. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal beginning position of the background music. After that, the processing for this RTC production is completed.

If it is determined in step S3418 that the demo video start flag is ON after the RTC effect (S3418: YES), the process proceeds to step S3421 and the demo video start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video start command starts a process for displaying the demo video on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal beginning position. After that, the process proceeds to step S3422, and the demo moving image display flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S3423.

In step S3423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because, in the present embodiment, the music to be output together with the demo video is not set. After executing step S3423, the process proceeds to step S3424, and the cue determination flag is turned ON. By this process, the cueing determination flag can be turned ON while the demo movie is being displayed. After executing step S3424, the process proceeds to step S3425, and the demo video start flag is turned off after the RTC effect. After that, the processing for this RTC production is completed.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a standby state transition process executed in the sound / light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the process (step S2701) of determining whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. , The point of executing the process (step S2700) of determining whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON, and the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment.

In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RTC effecting flag is ON (S2700: YES), the standby state transition process is terminated as it is. That is, it is configured so as not to shift to the standby state during the period during which the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC effecting flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process proceeds to step S2701 to determine whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. Since the following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed in the display side MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command correspondence process (FIG. 45) executed in the display side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is after the process of starting the display of the background moving image (step S3112) is executed, and other processes (step S3113). ) Is executed before the processes of steps S3112a and S3112b described later are executed, and the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment.

In step S3112a, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3112b to execute the process of starting the display of the RTC effect moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal beginning position. After executing step S3112b, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. Since the following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the mode of displaying the background moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and then the RTC effect moving image is displayed in advance. When the period ends, the mode of displaying the RTC production video shifts to the mode of displaying the background video, and when shifting to the mode of displaying the background video, the background video starts from a predetermined time position. Start displaying. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image. As a configuration in which the time position at which the background video is started to be displayed changes when the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background video, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, the RTC effect is produced. The configuration starts from the time position of the background video that was displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the mode of displaying the moving image, and the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is shifted to the mode of displaying the background video. When the background video is displayed, the time position of the background video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC production video, and the RTC production video is displayed from the mode of displaying the background video. Even after shifting to the mode, the playback of the background video is continued as an internal process, and when shifting from the mode of displaying the RTC effect video to the mode of displaying the background video, the background is continuously played as an internal process. Examples thereof include a configuration in which a moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of displaying the demo video is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and then the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video is completed. In this case, the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video, and when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the demo video. .. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo moving image is started changes when the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. In addition, as a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the demo video is started changes when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC production video ends, the RTC production is performed. The configuration is such that the display of the demo video is started from the time position of the demo video that was displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the mode of displaying the video, and the mode of displaying the RTC production video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video. The RTC production video is displayed from the configuration in which the time position of the demo video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC production video, and the mode of displaying the demo video. Even after shifting to the mode, the playback of the demo video is continued as an internal process, and when shifting from the mode of displaying the RTC production video to the mode of displaying the demo video, the demo is continuously played as an internal process. Examples thereof include a configuration in which a moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the display of the RTC effect video, the RTC effect video is interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period. Instead, the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo video after the predetermined display period of the RTC production video has expired, so that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even if the return condition is satisfied during the display of the RTC effect video, the RTC effect video is interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period. Instead, the mode of displaying the background video is restored after the predetermined display period of the RTC production video has expired, so that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially at the same time in each pachinko machine 10. Along with shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined time position when displaying the background moving image, so that the pachinko machine 10 displays the background moving image. You can synchronize the background video. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal leading position of the background moving image is obtained. Since the display is started from, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background video when shifting to the mode of displaying the background video. .. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display starts from a position in the middle of the time of the background video when shifting to the mode of displaying the background video, the player views the background video from the position in the middle of the time. As a result, you may feel a sense of discomfort, or you may feel unsatisfactory that there is a part of the background video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background video can be viewed by the player from the beginning position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to display the background video. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the time position is set in advance. Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the output of the background music is started fluctuates. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the time position at which the background music output starts fluctuates, for example, in FIG. 80, the mode shifts to the mode of outputting the RTC production music when the predetermined display period of the RTC production video ends. Output is started when the background music is output from the temporal position of the background music that was output at the timing immediately before the music is output, or when the mode shifts from the RTC production music output mode to the background music output mode. The temporal position of the background music to be played is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode of outputting the RTC production music, even after the transition from the mode of outputting the background music to the mode of outputting the RTC production music. In addition to continuing the playback of the background music as an internal process, when shifting from the mode of outputting RTC production music to the mode of outputting the background music, there is a configuration that outputs the background music that is continuously played as an internal process. Can be mentioned.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal leading position of the background music Since the output is started from, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background music, the player will appreciate the background music from the position in the middle of the time, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. You may feel unsatisfied with some of the background music that you haven't watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background music can be viewed by the player from the beginning position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to enjoy the background music. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially at the same time in each pachinko machine 10. Along with shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying from a predetermined time position of the demo video when displaying the demo video, so that the pachinko machines 10 are displayed. You can sync demo videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the temporal top position of the demo moving image is obtained. Since the display is started from, the player is given a sense of discomfort compared to the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the demo video when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video and displaying the demo video. Can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display of the demo video is started from a position in the middle of the time when the demo video is displayed by shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video, the player can display the demo video in time. Since you will be watching from a position in the middle, you may feel a sense of discomfort, or you may feel unsatisfactory that there is a part of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can watch the demo video from the beginning position in time, so that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the demo video can be viewed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 as the eighth embodiment will be described, and then the details of the process will be described. Since the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

H1. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88A shows the display surface 41a included in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in the figure, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a included in the pachinko machine 10. In the first hold display area Ds1, the hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 are displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 are displayed. Each hold display corresponds to the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired and stored based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. The maximum number of hold displays is four Dm11 to Dm14 in the first hold display area Ds1 and four Dm21 to Dm24 in the second hold display area Ds2.

In each hold display displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is subject to the jackpot lottery in the order of hold display Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, Dm14. Similarly, in each hold display displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is the target of the jackpot lottery in the order of the hold display Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, Dm24.

The display mode of each hold display suggests that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each hold display may win the jackpot lottery, and at the same time, there are a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the high and low of the possibility. Display mode is set. It is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is more likely to win the jackpot lottery as the display mode of the hold display becomes higher (ranks up) among the plurality of stages.

FIG. 88B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold display set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is set to a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank according to the high and low possibility of winning the jackpot lottery. The display mode of the hold display is set in order from the top, in five levels of actual display level Lvr5, actual display level Lvr4, actual display level Lvr3, actual display level Lvr2, and actual display level Lvr1. The higher the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery, the higher the display mode corresponding to the higher actual display level Lvr is set, and the lower the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery, the lower the display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set. ..

In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is represented by a color. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr5 is represented by yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is represented by red, the actual display level Lvr3 is represented by green, the actual display level Lvr2 is represented by blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is represented by white. The display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to the mode represented by color, but is a mode that can be recognized by the player, such as a mode represented by a pattern or a mode represented by a character. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference between the actual display levels Lvr is expressed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display to blue, an effect of changing the blue hold display to red, and the like are executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, the display mode changes as the order in which the changing hold display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery is later. The effect is executed so that the number of steps in which the actual display level Lvr is increased before and after the change in the display mode in the hold display is increased. More precisely, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. The more the case where The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference in the actual display level Lvr between the and after the change) becomes large.

Specifically, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is displayed higher than the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to the higher display mode. The difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) when changing to the mode is larger, and before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to the higher display mode. The difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode is larger than the difference in the stages (difference in the actual display level Lvr). , The display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the higher display mode based on the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) is larger.

In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the next higher stage. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to the higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) is one. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the display mode is changed to the display mode of two higher stages. That is, there are two differences (difference in actual display level Lvr) between the stages before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to the higher display mode. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to the display mode of three higher stages. That is, there are three differences (difference in actual display level Lvr) between the stages before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, the display mode is changed to four higher stages. That is, there are four differences (difference in actual display level Lvr) between the stages before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the higher display mode.

In the case of the hold display Dm11, for example, when the hold display Dm11 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to blue (actual display level Lvr2), which is the display mode of the next higher stage, and the hold display Dm11 is also used. When is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode of the next higher stage. In the case of the hold display Dm12, for example, when the hold display Dm12 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to green (actual display level Lvr3), which is a display mode of two higher stages, and the hold display Dm12 is also used. When is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode of two higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm13, for example, when the hold display Dm13 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is a display mode of three higher stages, and the hold display Dm13 is also used. When is blue (actual display level Lvr2), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode of three higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm14, for example, when the hold display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode of four higher stages.

When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, it is the same as changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In addition, among the displayed hold displays, the more the order in which the target of the jackpot lottery changes the display mode of the later hold display, the more the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width at the plurality of stages of is increased.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the displayed hold displays, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed. Hereinafter, an effect consisting of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display and a suggestion effect is also referred to as a hold effect.

89 and 90 are explanatory views for explaining the suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

FIG. 89A shows a suggestion effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11. In the suggestion effect (pattern 1), the gun W1 having a short range is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. After that, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as a suggestion effect, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm11.

FIG. 89B shows a suggestion effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. In the suggestion effect (pattern 2), the gun W2 having a range longer than that of the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 and hits the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm11 or hold display Dm12) hit by the bullet changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as a suggestion effect, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12.

FIG. 90A shows a suggestion effect (pattern 3) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. In the suggestion effect (pattern 3), the tank W3 equipped with a cannon having a range longer than that of the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a shell is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) hit by the shell changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as a suggestion effect, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13.

FIG. 90B shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. In the suggestion effect (pattern 4), the missile W4 having a range longer than that of the cannon included in the tank W3 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, the missile W4 is launched and hits the hold display of either the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12, hold display Dm13, or hold display Dm14) hit by the missile W4 changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as a suggestion effect, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, and also executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. Among them, the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed.

For example, when the missile W4 is displayed as a suggestion effect (see FIG. 90B), the hold display that may change the display mode is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. When the hold display on which the launched missile W4 hits is the hold display Dm13 rather than the hold display Dm12 and the hold display Dm14 rather than the hold display Dm13, the number of steps in which the actual display level Lvr increases before and after the change in the display mode increases. growing. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes which range of the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, when the suggestion effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14. (Recognize that the display mode of the hold display in any of the ranges will change), and guess which of the hold displays in the range will change the display mode, giving the player a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

Hereinafter, an example of the process for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between this embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing contents of the update process (first embodiment: FIG. 36) and the effect setting process (first embodiment: FIG. 37) at the time of winning. Therefore, in this description, the update process and the effect setting process at the time of winning in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of other processes will be omitted.

<Update process at the time of winning>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) in the update process at the time of winning is that a hold effect parameter setting process is added as step S3505 to the present embodiment. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the update process at the time of winning of the present embodiment and steps S2201 to S2204 (FIG. 36) in the update process at the time of winning of the first embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, description of the processes of steps S3501 to S3504 will be omitted.

The hold effect parameter setting process in step S3505 is a subroutine executed to execute the suggestion effect and set various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold display. The details of the parameter setting process for the hold effect will be described later.

Here, the storage area for the hold effect used for the parameter setting process for the hold effect will be described. The parameters set by the hold effect parameter setting process are stored in the hold effect storage area included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The hold effect storage area is a storage area provided in the sound / light side RAM 94 included in the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area for holding effect. The hold effect storage area includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area. FIG. 92 (a) shows the storage area for the first hold effect, and FIG. 92 (b) shows the storage area for the second hold effect.

The first hold effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14, which are the hold displays of the first hold display area Ds1. The second hold effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24, which are the hold displays of the second hold display area Ds2. Since the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area have the same configuration, the first reserved effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) will be described and shown in FIG. 92 (b). The description of the storage area for the second hold effect will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 92A, the first hold effect storage area stores various parameters and flags for each hold game number (n) for the first start port. The illustrated hold game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first start port correspond to the hold display Dm11 to the hold display Dm14. That is, the reserved game times (n = 1) of the first starting port are executed in the order of the reserved game times (n = 4) of the first starting port.

As shown in the figure, the storage area for the first hold effect is the additional level Lva, the display level upper limit Lvm, the actual display level Lvr, and the hold changeable flag for each hold game (n) for the first start port. Remember.

The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each reserved game times (n = 1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 1) of the first starting port is fixed at 1, and the additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 2) of the first starting port is fixed at 2. The additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 3) of the first starting port is fixed at 3, and the additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 4) of the first starting port is fixed at 4. There is. When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the additional level determines the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. It is possible to make it possible to increase the stepwise width (difference in the actual display level Lvr) at a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display as the case is changed. It is a parameter used for this purpose, and is a value corresponding to the number of steps of the actual display level Lvr that rises when the display mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger as the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 later in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery. In other words, it is a level value potentially given to each reserved game.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each reserved game round, and the stored area is adjacent to each time the game round is executed. Shift to the storage area for reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 4) of the first starting port. Each parameter of Then, it shifts to the storage area of the hold game times (n = 2) of the first start port in the first hold effect storage area.

The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines an upper limit value of how much the actual display level Lvr can be changed to a higher level when the display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, in the hold display in which the display level upper limit value Lvm is 5, the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 5. Hold display with a display level upper limit Lvm of 3 can change the actual display level Lvr to 3, but it is not possible to change the actual display level Lvr to an actual display level Lvr higher than 3 such as 4 or 5. Can not.

As described in FIG. 88, the actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display.

The display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values that are stored corresponding to the reserved game times when the game ball enters the starting port and the reserved game times exist. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), for example, at a certain time point, there are a reserved game number (n = 3) for the second starting port and a reserved game number (n = 4) for the second starting port. If not, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the reserved game times are not stored.

The hold changeable flag is used when executing a process of changing the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, the hold changeable flag is turned on in the hold game times that satisfy the condition that the display mode of the hold display can be changed, and is turned off after the hold display for changing the display mode is determined. NS. Hereinafter, a flowchart of the hold effect parameter setting process executed using the hold effect storage area will be described.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the parameter setting process for the hold effect. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

In step S3601, the display level upper limit value setting process is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. The details of the display level upper limit setting process will be described later. After executing the display level upper limit value setting process in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time. The parameter setting process for the hold effect is a process executed every time the game ball enters the start port. In step S3602, every time the game ball enters the start port, the hold effect storage area becomes the first. 1 Set 1 to the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry in the reserved effect storage area or the second reserved effect storage area. In this process, 1 is set for the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the incoming ball, so that the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the start port, the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry is set to 1, for example, depending on the entry. When the acquired reach random number counter C3 is scheduled to execute the reach effect by the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2, or the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entry is made. If the value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more, and the actual display level Lvr is based on the values of various counters acquired by entering the ball at the starting port. May be determined. After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, the additional level Lva is set. As described above, the value of the additional level Lva is fixed corresponding to each reserved game. Therefore, when the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time are the reserved game times (n = 1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, and the reserved game times (n = 2). In the case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and when the reserved game times (n = 3), 3 is set as the additional level Lva, and when the reserved game times (n = 4), the additional level Lva is set. 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

After executing step S3603, the parameter setting process for the hold effect is terminated.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the display level upper limit value setting process. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S3601) of the parameter setting process for holding effect.

In step S3701, the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time has won the jackpot lottery. Specifically, it is based on the information on the determination result of the advance determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the advance determination process executed when the ball enters the start port this time. To judge.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball have won the jackpot lottery (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the jackpot upper limit value table.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table. FIG. 95A shows a jackpot upper limit table.

The jackpot upper limit table is table data recorded by associating each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm with the value of the display level upper limit Lvm. The sound light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm by referring to the jackpot upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit value table, 80 values from 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 5 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. 10 values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 4, and 5 values of 5 to 9 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 3 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and the upper limit Five values from 0 to 4 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 2 as the value of the value setting counter Cm, and the value of 0 upper limit value setting counter Cm corresponds to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 1. Is set. That is, in the reserved game times in which the jackpot lottery is won, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 5 is the highest.

FIG. 95 (b) shows an upper limit table for reach. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3705 described later. Similar to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also the table data recorded by associating each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm with the value of the display level upper limit Lvm. Is. In the reserved game times in which reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm is 5 or 3 is high.

FIG. 95 (c) shows an upper limit table for non-reach generation. The reach non-occurrence upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3706 described later. Similar to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach non-occurrence upper limit table is also recorded in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other. It is table data. In the reserved game times in which the reach does not occur, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 1 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 2 is the highest.

The description returns to FIG. In step S3703, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step S3707.

On the other hand, in step S3702, if it is determined that the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time have not won the jackpot lottery (S3702: NO), the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball correspond to the game times that generate the reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game times corresponds to the reach generation. Specifically, based on the information on the determination result of the advance determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound light side MPU 92 by the advance determination process executed with the ball entering the start port this time. judge.

If it is determined in step S3704 that the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time correspond to the game times that generate the reach (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

In step S3705, the reach upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit value table. Then, the process proceeds to step S3707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3704 that the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball do not correspond to the game times that generate reach (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach non-generation upper limit value table. Then, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any one of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is set to the current hold game in the first hold effect storage area or the second hold effect storage area. Set in the storage area of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the times. After that, the display level upper limit setting process is terminated.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process according to the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command correspondence process.

The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) in the effect setting process is that the hold effect setting process is added as step S3801 in the present embodiment. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of the present embodiment and steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, the description of the processing of steps S3802 to S3815 will be omitted.

The hold effect setting process in step S3801 is executed to determine the hold game times for which the hold effect (the effect that changes the display mode of the suggestion effect and the hold display) is to be executed, and to set the content of the hold effect. It is a subroutine to be executed. Hereinafter, the details of the hold effect setting process will be described.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the hold effect setting process according to the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S3801) of the effect setting process.

In step S3901, the hold effect execution lottery process is executed. The hold effect execution lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the hold effect by lottery. Specifically, whether or not there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number counter among the plurality of numbers stored in the preset lottery table data obtained by acquiring the value from the random number counter for lottery. Is determined. If there is a number corresponding to the acquired random number value among the multiple numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the hold effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the acquired random number value, it is held. Decide not to perform the production. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold effect based on the result of the hold effect execution lottery process. If it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is to be executed (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is not executed (S3902: NO), the hold effect setting process ends.

In step S3903, the display level upper limit value Lvm of each reserved game is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit value of each reserved game time stored in the first reserved effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (a)) and the second reserved effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (b)). Read Lvm. After executing step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904.

In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game is read. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game time stored in the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area is read. After executing step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3905.

In step S3905, the additional level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game, and the added value in each reserved game is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S3906.

In step S3906, the reserved game times in which the display level upper limit value Lvm ≥ the actual display level Lvr + the additional level Lva are extracted. Specifically, the magnitude comparison between the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional level Lva calculated in step S3905 and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm is executed in each reserved game round, and the added value is the display level. The reserved game times of the upper limit value Lvm or less are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is raised by the level value (additional level Lva) determined for each reserved game. Extract reserved game times that have room to change. Not limited to the above extraction method, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is set to the level value determined for each reserved game. If it is possible to extract the reserved game times that have room to be changed to a higher level by (additional level Lva), another extraction method may be used. After executing step S3906, the process proceeds to step S3907.

In step S3907, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times in which the display level upper limit value Lvm ≧ the actual display level Lvr + the additional level Lva is turned ON. That is, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times, which can change the display mode of the hold display, is turned ON. After executing step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908.

In step S3908, the hold effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. The details of the pending effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S3908, the process proceeds to step S3909.

In step S3909, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, the information regarding the content of the hold effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command and transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After that, the present hold effect setting process is terminated.

<Process to determine the content of the pending production>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the hold effect content determination process. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 97: S3908) of the hold effect setting process.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a hold game number in which the hold changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of each of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area. do.

If it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4001: NO), the hold effect content determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4002 that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area, the process proceeds to step S4003 (S4002: YES).

In step S4003, among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed first is determined as the target for which the display mode of the hold display is changed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the reserved game times executed earlier is changed. After executing step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4002 that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the second hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed first is determined as the target for which the display mode of the hold display is changed. Then, the process proceeds to step S4005.

In step S4005, the value of the hold effect counter Ce is acquired. The hold effect counter Ce is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the effect content of the hold effect. The hold effect counter Ce is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Then, after executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006.

In step S4006, the table for determining the hold effect corresponding to the hold game times, which is the target for changing the display mode of the hold display, is referred to.

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a table for determining a hold effect. The table for determining the hold effect is set separately for each hold game.

In FIG. 99 (a), the game times determined as the target for changing the hold display are for the hold game times (n = 1) for the first start port (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second start port. Hold game times (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, the hold effect determination used when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a). It is a table for. When n = 1, 80 values of 22 to 99 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce in which the suggestion effect pattern 1 (see FIG. 89 (a)) is selected. Further, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce in which the suggestion effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is selected. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88A is changed, the probability that the suggestion effect pattern 1 is executed is high.

In FIG. 99 (b), the game times determined as the target for changing the hold display are the hold game times (n = 2) for the first start port or the hold game times (n = 2) for the second start port. That is, it is a hold effect determination table used when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88A is changed. When n = 2, the suggestion effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is selected, and 70 values of 30 to 99 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. The suggestion effect pattern 3 (see FIG. 90A) is selected, and 20 values of 10 to 29 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. Further, the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B) is selected, and 10 values 0 to 9 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88A is changed, the suggestion effect pattern 2 is most likely to be executed, and then the suggestion effect pattern 3 is executed. The probability is high.

In FIG. 99 (c), the game times determined as the target for changing the hold display are for the hold game times (n = 3) for the first start port (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second start port. Hold game times (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, the hold effect determination used when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a). It is a table for. When n = 3, 80 values of 20 to 99 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce in which the suggestion effect pattern 3 (see FIG. 90 (a)) is selected. Further, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce in which the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B) is selected. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88A is changed, the probability that the suggestion effect pattern 3 is executed is high.

In FIG. 99 (d), the game times determined as the target for changing the hold display are the hold game times (n = 4) for the first start port or the hold game times (n = 4) for the second start port. That is, it is a hold effect determination table used when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88A is changed. When n = 4, the values 0 to 99 (100 pieces) of all the hold effect counters Ce are set in the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90 (b)). That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88A is changed, the suggestion effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

By setting the hold effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 2 is displayed, the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22) The display mode of is changed. When the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises to a higher level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes. , The actual display level Lvr goes up by two levels according to the value of the additional level Lva.

Further, for example, when the missile W4 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or the hold display Dm14 (Dm24) is displayed. Change. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises to two higher levels according to the value of the additional level Lva, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 changes, the additional level The actual display level Lvr goes up three levels according to the value of Lva, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr goes up four levels according to the value of the additional level Lva. Go up to the level of.

Therefore, by executing the suggestion effect, the player is made to roughly guess which hold display display mode is changed. Further, since the number of levels at which the actual display level Lvr is raised differs depending on the hold display for which the display mode is changed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After executing step S4006, the process proceeds to step S4007.

In step S4007, the content of the determined hold effect is set in the hold effect command. For example, when it is decided to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the suggestion effect to be executed is the suggestion effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Set identifiable information as a command. Then, the process proceeds to step S4008.

In step S4008, all the hold changeable flags that have been turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S4009.

In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times for which the display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr is changed (increased) by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the hold effect is actually changed after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of display level Lvr. After that, the process of determining the content of the pending effect is completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the jackpot random number counter C1 is displayed in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery. The more the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of is changed, the wider the stepwise width of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display at a plurality of stages becomes larger. The display mode of is changed. By executing such a process, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following effects.

Normally, when the hold display is displayed, the chance that the display mode changes decreases as the remaining time until the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery becomes shorter. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 whose order is the target of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display is the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted in the displayed hold display. Is relatively shorter in the remaining time to be displayed and less likely to change the display mode than the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 later. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially displays the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Hope to change. However, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted among the displayed hold displays. As the display mode of the above is changed, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display changes relatively later in the order in which the jackpot lottery is applied among the displayed hold displays, the hold display is displayed. Since the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and rather, further expectations. A feeling can be given.

That is, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment holds the pachinko machine 10 based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined. The display mode of the display is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the reserved game times corresponding to the other reserved display by using the reserved display of the target whose display mode is determined.

More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the reserved game times corresponding to other reserved displays by using the reserved display of the target whose display mode is changed.

When determining the display mode of the hold display, the process of determining the display mode of the hold display is based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined. As another example, it is also possible to execute the following processing.

For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined is the jackpot random number counter that is the target of the jackpot lottery before the jackpot random number counter C1. When the display mode is more favorable to the player than the value of C1, the display mode of the hold display, which is the target for determining the display mode, is determined to be a specific display mode. In addition, information about other hold indications can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player not only infers the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, but also executes it before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the outcome of the reserved game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency more than before, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. As another example of the process of determining the display mode after the display is changed, the following process can be executed.

For example, the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. It is possible to determine the display mode after the change of. As a result, the following playability can be realized. For example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 to be determined by the determination means is preceded by the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. It is possible to change to a display mode (display mode that is advantageous to the player) at a stage higher than the display mode. In this way, various new game features can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is changed. On the other hand, it is possible to draw the player's attention and give a feeling of expectation. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be noticed. That is, in addition to the effect of executing the suggestion effect such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency for the subsequent game times, the suggestion effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and urgency in response to the change in the display mode of the hold display, aiming to improve the interest of the synergistic game. be able to.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment selects the suggestion effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed, among the displayed hold displays. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, and to give the player a sense of expectation as to which of the pending displays is the target for which the display mode changes.

In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is executed, the stepwise width (before the change of the display mode) at a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. A process of selecting a suggestion effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared may be adopted according to the magnitude of the actual display level Lvr difference between the and after the change. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition, the effect executed as a suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player with respect to the type.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to the one higher stage, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to the second higher stage. When the display mode is changed and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of three higher stages, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the display mode of the four higher stages is changed. The stepwise width at multiple stages of the set display mode (actual display between before and after the change of the display mode) between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. Other aspects may be adopted as the magnitude of the level Lvr difference).

For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, it is changed to the display mode of one higher stage, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of four higher stages. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to the display mode of 6 higher stages, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, it is changed to the display mode of 10 higher stages. When changing the display mode of the hold display, the more the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 later changes in the order of being the target of the jackpot lottery, the more relative it is. In particular, a stepwise width (before and after the change in the display mode) in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display. Any other mode may be adopted as long as the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the actual display level is large. The values of the additional levels in the first reserved effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the second reserved effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (b) are assigned to the jackpot lottery later. It can be realized by setting the order of the jackpot lottery to be a relatively large value as compared with the previous reserved game times. In this case, the upper limit of the possible actual display level Lvr and the upper limit of the display level Lvm may be set to a value larger than the maximum value of the possible additional display level Lva such as 15 or 20. Further, the pattern of the display mode of the hold display may be set corresponding to each value of the actual display level Lvr that can be taken.

Furthermore, there are a plurality of additional level patterns in which the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted is the later reserved game times, and the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted becomes a relatively large value as compared with the earlier reserved game times. May be. That is, as in the present embodiment, a pattern in which the value of the additional level Lva corresponding to the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 is (1,2,3,4) or (2,4) , 6,10) and (1,5,8,10) may have a plurality of additional level Lva patterns, and which pattern to apply may be determined by lottery.

Further, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by applying the process described in the above embodiment. Further, a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed by applying the process described in the above embodiment and a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed without applying the process described in the above embodiment are determined by lottery. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, but the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, etc. , May be determined based on various parameters associated with each reserved game. Further, among these various parameters, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters. For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the probability of setting the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr to higher values in the case of jackpot than in the case of deviation is increased, and the jackpot type counter Based on the value of C2, the probability variation jackpot may be set higher than the normal jackpot. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, in the case of reach occurrence, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be set higher than in the case of non-reach occurrence.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 as the ninth embodiment will be described, and then the details of the process will be described. Since the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

I1. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
The feature of the present embodiment is that the hold effect (the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display and the suggestion effect) is executed as in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

In the eighth embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display in which the order to be the target of the jackpot lottery corresponds to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 later in the displayed hold display. The more the display mode is changed, the more the stepwise width (actual between before and after the change of the display mode) between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display at a plurality of stages of the display mode. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the display level (difference in display level Lvr) becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display mode is higher than the hold display mode of the hold game times that is executed before the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed. Change to display. More precisely, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery before the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display which is the target for changing the display mode. The display mode is changed to a stage higher than the display mode of the display.

A specific example will be shown with reference to FIG. 88 (a). For example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is green and the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 may be changed. , The display mode is changed to a display mode higher than green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11, which is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm12. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to red or yellow, which is a display mode higher than green.

As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is green, and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, The display mode is changed to blue, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11, which is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm13, and green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to red or yellow, which is a display mode higher than blue and green.

When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 is also changed. Similarly, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode is changed to a higher hold display than the hold display display mode of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display of the target whose display mode is to be changed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, as in the eighth embodiment. .. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the displayed hold displays, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

In FIG. 100, a suggestion effect (pattern 1), a suggestion effect (pattern 2), and a suggestion effect executed prior to changing each display mode of the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 are shown. (Pattern 3) and suggestive effect (Pattern 4) are shown.

This suggestion production is a production that imitates the long jump. For example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed. The suggestion effect (pattern 1) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after the run-up and descends on the hold display Dm11. After the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed. The suggestion effect (pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after the run-up and descends on the hold display Dm14. After the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the same effect as the suggestion effect described above is executed, and then the hold display Dm21, the hold display Dm22, The display mode of the hold display Dm23 or the hold display Dm24 changes.

The above-mentioned suggestion effect is an effect in which the hold display that changes the display mode is determined depending on the flight distance of the jump after the character Ch runs up. Therefore, for example, by lengthening the flight time after the character Ch jumps, it is possible to make the player guess which hold display to land on, and give a feeling of expectation and tension.

Hereinafter, an example of the process for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, the difference from the process in the eighth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area for holding effect according to the ninth embodiment. The hold effect storage area in the ninth embodiment includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area, as in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 101 (a) shows the storage area for the first hold effect, and FIG. 101 (b) shows the storage area for the second hold effect.

The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area of the present embodiment do not include a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a fixed value for each hold game time, but is a hold game time of the hold display that changes the display mode in the process of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the hold display. (See FIG. 104: step S4305). The description of the reserved effect storage area of the ninth embodiment will be omitted because the other points are the same as those of the eighth embodiment.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a hold effect parameter setting process according to the ninth embodiment. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

The difference between the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment and the hold effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment is that the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment is added to the hold effect parameter setting process executed in the eighth embodiment. There is no process (FIG. 93: S3603) for setting the level Lva to the reserved information storage area 64b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a fixed value for each reserved game times in the reserved information storage area 64b, but is determined in the process of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the reserved display. Will be done. Therefore, in the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the additional level Lva is not executed.

Since other processes are the same as the hold effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Since the processing content of the display level upper limit value setting process, which is the subroutine executed in step S4101, is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a hold effect setting process according to the ninth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S3801) of the effect setting process.

The processes of steps S4201 to S4204 of the hold effect setting process in the present embodiment and steps S3901 to S3904 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, the processing after step S4205 will be described.

The process of step S4205 to step S4209 is a process executed to extract a hold display whose display mode can be changed. That is, it is a process of extracting a hold display that can be changed to a higher hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display of the target whose display mode is to be changed.

In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm of each hold game time recorded in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are read, and any of the earlier executions is held. The reserved game times in which the display level upper limit value Lvm having a value larger than the actual display level Lvr value of the game times is recorded is extracted.

Explaining by taking the first reserved effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) as an example, the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4) of the reserved game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the reserved game times (= 4). Since it is larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any of the reserved game times executed before n = 3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game times (n = 3) are the game times extracted by step S4205.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 2) (hold display Dm12) is the hold game times (n = 1) executed before the hold game times (n = 2). Since it is smaller than the actual display level Lvr (= 2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game times (n = 2) are game times that are not extracted in step S4205.

In addition, among the reserved game times, there is no game time executed before the reserved game times corresponding to the reserved display Dm11 and the reserved display Dm21. That is, in the first reserved effect storage area, there is no game number executed before the reserved game number (n = 1). Further, in the second reserved effect storage area, there is no game number executed before the reserved game number (n = 1). Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the conditions of step S4205 are satisfied for the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, if the hold game times exist, it is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205. Extract in the process. After executing step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4206.

In step S4206, from the reserved game times extracted in step S4205, the reserved game times in which the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr are extracted. That is, the reserved game times that have room for changing the display mode are extracted.

Taking the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) as an example, the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the display level upper limit value Lvm ( = Less than 4). Therefore, in this case, the reserved game times (n = 3) satisfy the condition in step S4206 and are extracted by the process.

After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times extracted in the process of step S4206 is turned ON. After executing step S4207, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4208, the hold effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. The details of the pending effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, the information regarding the content of the hold effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command and transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After that, the present hold effect setting process is terminated.

<Process to determine the content of the pending production>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a hold effect content determination process according to the ninth embodiment. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 103: S4208) of the hold effect parameter setting process.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not there is a hold game number in which the hold changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of each of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area. do.

If it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4301: NO), the hold effect content determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4301: YES), the process proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4302 that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area, the process proceeds to step S4303 (S4302: YES).

In step S4303, among the reserved game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed later is determined as the target for which the display mode of the hold display is changed. In the eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), among the reserved game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed first is displayed on hold. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed for the hold game times to be executed later. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, if the hold game times exist, the hold game times are present. It is automatically considered that the condition in step S4205 is satisfied, and is extracted in the process. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the hold changeable flag will be turned ON in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, and in step S4303, if the process in the eighth embodiment is performed, the first When the hold game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the storage area for hold effect, there is a high probability that the hold display Dm11 And the hold display Dm21 becomes a target for changing the display mode, and even if the display mode of the hold display is changed, it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the reserved game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed later is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display. do. After executing step S4303, the process proceeds to step S4305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

In step S4304, among the reserved game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the second hold effect storage area, the hold game time to be executed later is determined as the target for which the display mode of the hold display is changed. After executing step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4305, the additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, it is determined how much the display mode is changed to a higher level. More specifically, it determines the stepwise width at multiple stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display.

Specifically, the difference value between the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. do. For example, when the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm13 shown in the first hold effect recording area of FIG. 101A are determined as the target for changing the display mode, the display level upper limit value Lvm (=) of the hold display Dm13. The difference value (= 3) between 4) and the actual display level Lvr (= 1) is calculated. Then, one value is determined from the values from 1 to 3, which is a difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining one value, a random number may be used for determination, or the maximum value of possible values (3 in this specific example) may always be adopted. In this way, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process proceeds to step S4306.

In step S4306, the content of the hold effect is determined. Specifically, the content of the suggestion effect according to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed and the display mode of the hold display after the change are determined. For example, when the target for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11, the suggestion effect is determined to be the suggestion effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. 100. Similarly, when the target for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14, the suggestion effect (pattern 2), the suggestion effect (pattern 3), or the suggestion effect ( Determine in pattern 4).

Further, when determining the display mode of the hold display after the change, the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional display level Lva of the hold display to be changed is calculated, and the added value corresponds to the added value. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence between the actual display level Lvr and the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 88 (b). For example, when the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm13 shown in the first hold effect recording area of FIG. 101 (a) are determined as the target for changing the display mode, the additional display level Lva is set to 2. In this case, since the added value of the actual display level Lvr (= 1) and the additional display level Lva (= 2) is 3, the display mode of the actual display level Lvr and the hold display shown in FIG. 88 (b). Based on the correspondence with, the display mode of the hold display after the change is determined to be green. After executing step S4306, the process proceeds to step S4307.

In step S4307, the content of the determined hold effect is set in the hold effect command. Then, the process proceeds to step S4308.

In step S4308, all the hold changeable flags that have been turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S4309.

In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times for which the display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level has changed due to the change in the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the hold effect can be changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode has changed. Update to the value of. After that, the process of determining the content of the pending effect is completed.

As described above, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the target of the jackpot lottery before the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. The display mode is changed to a stage higher than the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1. By executing such a process, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following effects.

For example, when there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed, and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player may want to change the display mode of the specific hold display. You may want to change. However, contrary to the player's wish, the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the target of the jackpot lottery after the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display in which the player wishes to change the display mode. Display mode may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the predetermined hold display is changed, the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the target of the jackpot lottery is set before the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined hold display. The display mode is changed to a stage higher than the display mode of the corresponding hold display. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, the display of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery after the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode. Even when the mode is changed, the hold display in which the display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of the random number, and on the contrary, it is possible to give a further sense of expectation.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment corresponds to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined when determining the display mode of the hold display, as in the eighth embodiment. Based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the display mode of the hold display is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the reserved game times corresponding to the other reserved display by using the reserved display of the target whose display mode is determined.

More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the reserved game times corresponding to other reserved displays by using the reserved display of the target whose display mode is changed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, as in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the player and give a feeling of expectation to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be noticed. That is, in addition to the effect of executing the suggestion effect such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency for the subsequent game times, the suggestion effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and urgency in response to the change in the display mode of the hold display, aiming to improve the interest of the synergistic game. be able to.

In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is executed, the stepwise width (before the change of the display mode) at a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. A process of selecting a suggestion effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared may be adopted according to the magnitude of the actual display level Lvr difference between the and after the change. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition, the effect executed as a suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player with respect to the type.

J. Tenth embodiment:
It is also possible to adopt a suggestion effect different from that of the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. The other suggestive effects that can be adopted will be described below.

<Another example of suggestion production 1>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the suggestion effect of the present alternative example, the player selects the hold display to be the target for changing the display mode. Specifically, at the same time as the game round is started, a display prompting the player to select a hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed within the time limit by operating the effect operation button 24 is displayed on the display surface 41a. do. The time limit is set to a time that allows the player to select the hold display within the fluctuation time of the game time being executed, for example, the time limit is set to one second shorter than the fluctuation time of the game time to be executed. do.

Each time the player operates the effect operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed above the hold display moves to the left by one, and the effect operation button 24 operates after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing hold display. If so, the arrow YJ is moved over the hold display Dm11 again.

As shown in FIG. 105 (b), at the timing when the time limit expires, another object (object X1 of "smoke" in FIG. 105 (b)) is temporarily displayed on hold display located below the arrow YJ. By doing so, the player cannot see the hold display.

After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

Hereinafter, the process for realizing the suggestion effect in the first embodiment will be specifically described.

FIG. 106 is a storage area for holding effect in another example 1. FIG. 106 (a) shows the storage area for the first hold effect in the first embodiment, and FIG. 106 (b) shows the storage area for the second hold effect in the first example. The storage area for the hold effect in the first embodiment includes a storage area for storing the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to each hold game times. The method of determining the display level upper limit value Lvm value and the actual display level Lvr value of each reserved game round is the same as that of the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, and is determined in the holding effect parameter setting process.

In the suggestion effect, when the time limit has elapsed and the reserved game times selected by the player are determined, it is determined in the selected reserved game times whether the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is determined, and the display level upper limit value is determined. When Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold game times selected by the player is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 has the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. The display mode is changed to correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, it is displayed from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before changing the display mode to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

If the reserved game times selected by the player is not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr (for example, the reserved display Dm11 in FIG. 106 (a)), the display mode of the selected reserved display is Do not change.

In addition, the suggestion effect in the first embodiment can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above.

First, a case where the suggestion effect in the first embodiment is applied to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode, the first hold effect of the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON. The hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed first in the memory area for use or the second hold effect storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of the process, the player performs the effect operation. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by the operation of the effect operation button 24 is not ON. In that case, a process of not changing the hold display may be applied.

Then, the suggestion effect of Another Example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily displayed as another object (object X1 of "smoke" in FIG. 105 (b)). By displaying the hold display, the player cannot see the hold display.

After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing so, a new game property is created in which the player is allowed to select the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Further, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed, the later the order in which the hold display selected by the player among the existing hold displays is the target of the jackpot lottery is. , The number of stages in which the display mode is ranked up between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display, which is the target for which the display mode is changed, becomes large, and the same effect as that of the eighth embodiment is obtained, and the game It is possible to give a feeling of expectation to a person.

Next, a case where the suggestion effect in the first embodiment is applied to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment described above, in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode, the first hold effect of the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON. The hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed after the second hold effect storage area or the second hold effect storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of the process, the player presses the effect operation button. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by the operation of the effect operation button 24 is not ON. The process of not changing the hold display may be applied to.

Then, the suggestion effect of Another Example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily displayed as another object (object X1 of "smoke" in FIG. 105 (b)). By displaying the hold display, the player cannot see the hold display.

After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing so, a new game property is created in which the player is allowed to select the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Further, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed, the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed is higher than the display mode of the hold display. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the same effect as that of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the player can be given a sense of expectation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can create a new playability such as allowing the player to select the hold display in the suggestion effect. Further, as described above, the suggestion effect of causing the player to select the hold display in the first embodiment can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display depending on whether or not the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is ON. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player himself / herself changes.

In this case, when the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to overturn the player's perception that the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. Further, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described in the eighth embodiment, also in the first embodiment, there are a plurality of set display modes before and after the change of the hold display to be changed when the suggestion effect is executed. Select the suggestion effect to be executed from the multiple types of suggestion effects prepared according to the size of the stepwise width (difference in the actual display level Lvr between before and after the change in the display mode) in the stage. You may adopt the processing to do. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition, the effect executed as a suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player with respect to the type.

<Another example of suggestion production 2>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 107 (a) shows the state of the suggestion effect in this alternative example. FIG. 107 (b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in the present alternative example is completed.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the suggestion effect of this alternative example is a suggestion effect that is launched toward the hold display on which the missile W5 changes the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this alternative example, although the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, it explodes without hitting any of the hold displays. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), despite the execution of the suggestion effect in the present alternative example, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect is completed does not change. .. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

The second example 2 also uses the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area shown in FIG. 106. Then, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined reserved game times, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment ( As in the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in b), the suggestion effect for changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. Change to.

For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 has a display level upper limit value Lvm> an actual display level Lvr. The same suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, it is displayed from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before changing the display mode to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display to be changed in the display mode, when the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, it is shown in FIG. 107 (a) of this alternative example 2. Perform a suggestion effect.

By executing the suggestion effect in the second embodiment in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to overturn the recognition and add unexpectedness to the game. Further, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Another example of suggestion production 3>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 108 (a) shows the state of the suggestion effect in this alternative example. FIG. 108B shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in the present alternative example is completed.

As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the suggestion effect of this alternative example is a suggestion effect that is launched toward the hold display on which the missile W5 changes the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this alternative example, the missile W5 was launched toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, and despite hitting the hold display, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the said missile W5. The display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect is completed does not change.

The suggestion effect can be realized by executing the same process as in the second example. Specifically, the storage area for the first hold effect and the storage area for the second hold effect shown in FIG. 106 are used. Then, the hold display to be changed in the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined reserved game times, it is determined whether the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, the figure 90 (b) of the eighth embodiment shows. As shown in the suggestion effect (pattern 4), the suggestion effect for changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. ..

For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display to be changed in the display mode is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 has a display level upper limit value Lvm> an actual display level Lvr. The same suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, it is displayed from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before changing the display mode to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display to be changed in the display mode, when the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, the suggestion effect in FIG. To execute.

By executing the suggestion effect in the third embodiment in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to overturn the recognition and add unexpectedness to the game. Further, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Another example of suggestion production 4>
After executing the suggestion effect, the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays may be changed. For example, in the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area shown in FIG. 106, when two or more adjacent reserved game times, the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. The display mode of the two or more adjacent hold displays is changed substantially at the same time.

Further, for example, the following suggestion effect can be executed prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 109 (a) shows the state of the suggestion effect in this alternative example. FIG. 109 (b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in the present alternative example is completed.

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the suggestion effect of this alternative example is a suggestion effect that is launched toward the hold display on which the missile W5 changes the display mode. In the suggestion effect of this alternative example, the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, and corresponds to two adjacent hold displays. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the display mode of the two adjacent hold displays changes.

By executing such a suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how many hold display display modes will change after the suggestion effect is executed.

K. Modification example:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

K1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are executed, but the suggestion effect is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even if the suggestive effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game in the second game, even though the jackpot lottery for the second game has been won. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round has been won. In addition, even if the suggestive effect is omitted, the player is surprised and the game is played by executing the game time reproduction effect due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Surprisingness can be given.

K2. Modification 2:
In the case a2 of the first embodiment and the case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestion effect was executed during the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game round, the suggestion effect may be executed before the game round reproduction effect. That is, the suggestion effect can be executed at any timing as long as the timing is before the already executed effect is reproduced. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are executed. Therefore, for example, the effect executed in the second game time has already been performed. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the executed production.

K3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the game time that is a big hit. A production performed in a game time that is not a big hit, for example, a reach production in a game time of a miss (with reach) may be a target of reproduction in a special game state reproduction production and a game time reproduction production, or a game of a miss (without reach). The notice production at the time may be the target of reproduction.

K4. Modification 4:
The first game times and the second game times defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game times executed consecutively. For example, there may be other game times between the first game time and the second game time.

K5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments described above, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed during the ending period of the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state. bottom. For example, in the first embodiment, the effects executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round are the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Whether or not the suggestion effect is to be obtained as shown in case a2 is determined based on the special information related to the second game times executed after the special game state, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestion effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and any other effect is adopted. May be good. For example, other effects such as a normal reach effect (a reach effect that is not the target of the special game state reproduction effect) or an effect that is executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute the effect in consideration of the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

K6. Modification 6:
The processes executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used in combination. That is, case a1 (FIG. 9 (a)) and case a2 (FIG. 9 (b)), which are processes executed in the first embodiment, and processes executed in the second embodiment (FIGS. 46 (a), (b)). ), Case c1 (FIG. 48 (a)) and case c2 (FIG. 48 (b)) which are the processes executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 49 (a)) which is the process executed in the fourth embodiment. )) And Case d2 (FIG. 49 (b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used in combination. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined treatment. For example, it is possible to improve the degree of attention and expectation of the player with respect to the effect of reproducing the already executed effect such as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect.

K7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the jackpot lottery is won is described as an example, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is won. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied may be adopted. As described above, even if other conditions are set as predetermined conditions, the same effects as those described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

K8. Modification 8:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, three types of images of objects A to C are adopted as the object images used for the advance notice effect, but the configuration is not limited to such. For example, as the object image used for the advance notice effect, two types of object images may be adopted, or four types of object images may be adopted. As described above, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained. Further, various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

K9. Modification 9:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the expectation of a jackpot is shown to the player as the situation of the game depending on how the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect are combined. For example, the expectation of the jackpot is expected. As the game situation, such as the degree and the degree of expectation that the current game state is a probabilistic state, a configuration that shows the player various game situations may be adopted.

K10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown by an example in FIG. 54, each display pattern table of the object A, the object B, and the object C has three big hits, a miss (with reach), and a miss (without reach). Each display pattern random number was divided into cases, and for example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of object B was further divided into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot. The effect of the object B may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probabilistic jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent probability change state exists, the effect by the object C may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change state of the current game times. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function of suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, a jackpot expectation degree or a jackpot expectation degree). You may indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game (such as the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot).

K11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object is set so as to change with time. You may be. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period is displayed. The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as not to overlap each other.

K12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed so that the image frame is not displayed, but the display pattern (A1) is executed. The image frame of the image A1, the image A2, and a part or all of the image A3 displayed as −A2-A3) may not be displayed. Further, the same processing may be executed for other object images.

K13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which arrangement and display start timing are set for each combination of object images displayed as a notice effect by the arrangement / timing setting table. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, in the advance notice effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, the advance notice effect in which (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, or the combination of (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) is performed. There are multiple types of notice effects, such as notice effects. The arrangement and display start timing of each object image may be set for each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. By doing so, the effect executed by displaying the plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

K14. Modification 14:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. The relative arrangement position between the objects and the display timing are set so that the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, it is set to be displayed in a narrative mode as a related mode, but as a related mode, a plurality of objects are set to be displayed in a mode having one idea. Various aspects can be adopted as a mode in which a plurality of objects are related, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed and a configuration in which a plurality of objects are set to be displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule.

K15. Modification 15:
Each display pattern set in the display pattern table described in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in the above embodiment, and a display pattern of another mode is adopted. Can be done. For example, a display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern of the object C (C1-C2-C3) is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog appearing from the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C and the object B are combined is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the worsening weather, and is a display pattern of the game. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the situation is disadvantageous, it is possible to perform various effects by combining each object, and the objects can be effectively used.

K16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, as the image used for the advance notice effect, an object A, an object B, an object C, or an image obtained by combining these is adopted, but other images may be adopted.

FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for the advance notice effect. The object D is composed of three images, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 110 (a) shows image D1, FIG. 110 (b) shows image D2, and FIG. 110 (c) shows image D3. As shown in the figure, the object D represents a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 shows how a male character and a female character are staring at each other at a certain distance. Image D2 shows a male character and a female character staring at each other at a short distance. Image D3 shows how a male character and a female character are holding hands and getting along with each other. Further, in the image D3, it is expressed that the female character is talking to the male character so as to keep the fact that he is getting along with the female character secret from the father of the female character.

An object D composed of images having such contents depicts a state in which a romance between a man and a woman is fulfilled as the images progress in the order of image D1, image D2, and image D3. Image D3 generally gives a better impression than image D2. That is, the image D2 from the image D1 and the image D3 from the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine in the modified example 16 is provided with a display pattern table for D as a display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, off (with reach), and off (without reach), each of them is hidden and has a display pattern. Four display patterns (D1), a display pattern (D1-D2), and a display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are assigned. In the display pattern table for D, the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (without reach), and the above in the case of deviation (with reach). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so as to be high.

The pachinko machine in this modification further executes a preview effect in which the object D is combined with the image E as another image.

FIG. 111 shows an image (object D + image E) in which the image E is combined with the object D. As shown in the figure, the image E, which is an image to be combined with the object D, represents the father of a female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], and is composed of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image]. It is an image that changes with time in the order of D3 + image E]. FIG. 111 (a) shows [image D1 + image E], FIG. 111 (b) shows [image D2 + image E], and FIG. 111 (c) shows [image D3 + image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D + image E shows the female character's father looking at the love pattern of the male character and the female character from behind the pillar. Specifically, [Image D1 + Image E] expresses how a male character and a female character are staring at each other at a certain distance from each other, and how the female character's father is watching from behind a pillar. Has been done. [Image D2 + Image E] shows how the male character and the female character are staring at each other at a short distance, and the female character's father is watching from behind the pillar. In [Image D3 + Image E], the male character and the female character hold hands, and the female character tells the male character that he is on good terms with the female character's father. The appearance of the female character's father watching from behind the pillar is expressed.

The object D + image E composed of images having such contents becomes a female character and a father as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is presumed that the parent-child relationship will deteriorate. Therefore, as the image progresses in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], it generally gives a bad impression. In other words, [Image D2 + Image E] from [Image D3 + Image E] and [Image D1 + Image E] from [Image D2 + Image E] generally give a good impression. That is, [Image D2 + Image E] from [Image D3 + Image E] and [Image D1 + Image E] from [Image D2 + Image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game.

Further, the object D + image E is displayed as an effect image set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery decreases as the process progresses to [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine in the modified example 16 is provided with a display pattern table for DE as a display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, off (with reach), and off (without reach), each of them is hidden and has a display pattern. Four display patterns (D1 / E), a display pattern (D1-D2 / E), and a display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) are assigned. In the DE display pattern table, when the display pattern table is out of reach (without reach), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and the display pattern is out of order (with reach). In the case, the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1 / E) is the most displayed among the above four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency is increased.

By doing so, the same effect as that of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modification, the case where the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E is better than the case where the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E when the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E, even though the player is given an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game. It is possible to give the player a more advantageous perception of the situation of the game than when it is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, by devising the method of combining the images and the content of the images, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the situation of the game.

Further, the probability that the jackpot lottery is won is higher when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. The jackpot lottery is performed when the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a even though the image D1 is high, as compared with the case where the image D3 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. There is a high probability that you have won. Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with the effect image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the degree of expectation increase, the player can be given a completely different perception of the game situation. can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the above effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the above effect is also exerted between the image D1 and the image D2 and between the image D2 and the image D3.

K17. Modification 17:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music becomes zero through the mode of reducing the volume of the background music with the passage of time while continuing the output of the background music. The configuration is such that the transition to a certain mode is made, but instead, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the sound is changed to a mode in which the volume of the background music is reduced with the passage of time while continuing the output of the background music. It is also possible to shift to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo movie 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be changed to a mode in which the demo moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

Further, in the above embodiment, the background music output itself is continued until 5 seconds have passed since the volume of the background music became zero, and the background music output is stopped after 5 seconds have passed. Instead of this, the output of the background music may be stopped at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

K18. Modification 18:
In the above embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the time beginning of the background video The display is started from the position "01" and the output is started from the temporal beginning position "01" of the background music. However, the background video and the background music are started to be displayed and output from the temporal beginning position. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, the background moving image and the background music may be configured to start displaying and outputting from a predetermined most exciting time position (so-called chorus start position). That is, the display is started from the predetermined time position of the background video, and the output is output from the predetermined time position of the background music corresponding to the predetermined time position of the background video. It may be configured to start. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background video and the output of the background music are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video is started changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

K19. Modification 19:
In the above embodiment, the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied, but the volume of the background music may not be completely set to zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to a volume lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been satisfied.

Further, the audio output mode before the transition condition is satisfied is the mode in which the background music is output at the volume of the first loudness, and the audio output mode in which the transition is performed after the transition condition is satisfied is the background music. It is also possible to output at a volume of a second loudness smaller than the volume of the loudness of. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been satisfied.

K20. Modification 20:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, but before the transition condition is satisfied. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demo moving image. For example, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is the mode of displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied is the said. It may be a mode in which an image different from a predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied includes a mode of displaying a moving image different from the predetermined moving image, a mode of stopping and displaying at least a part of the predetermined moving image, and the predetermined one. The moving image may be hidden, a still image different from the predetermined moving image may be displayed, or the moving image and the still image may be hidden.

K21. Modification 21:
In the above embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board 30 is provided, and when the game ball is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by the detection sensor, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. It may be configured to be used. In this way, if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, the transition condition is not satisfied, so that the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing, which is an unpleasant situation for the player. Can be reduced.

Further, if the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is satisfied, it may be determined that the return condition is satisfied. In this way, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is unpleasant for the player, such as the fact that is not established for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

K22. Modification 22:
In the above embodiment, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background video and the background music corresponding to the background video may be selected depending on whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the selection of the player, and the like.

K23. Modification 23:
The time, numerical value, etc. specifically set in the above embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately set to other time, numerical value, or the like. For example, the time from when the movement of the symbol stops until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demo video starts is It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

K24. Modification 24:
In the above embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode of displaying a demo moving image, the sound output mode is configured such that music is not output and the volume is zero. Instead, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying a demo video, the audio output mode is the output level preset by the player for the demo music, which is the music corresponding to the demo video. It may be configured to output at (volume).

In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the output may be started from a predetermined time position of the demo music. With such a configuration, the display of the demo video and the output of the demo music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the output of the demo music starts varies. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, a predetermined time position of the demo music may be set as the time start position of the demo music. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the time of the demo music.

K25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information about the time, from the RTC96, and the acquired time information coincides with a predetermined time set as an RTC effect start condition. It is configured to start the process for executing the RTC effect when it is determined whether or not the RTC effect is matched, but instead, the voice emission control device 90 is configured to start the RTC effect once. The elapsed time since the start of the previous RTC effect is measured, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the previous RTC effect was started, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. If this is the case, the process for executing the RTC effect may be started.

K26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to output RTC production music at an output level (volume) preset by the player, but instead, the sound emission control device 90 is a game. The RTC production music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the person. According to such a configuration, the power and attention of the RTC production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

K27. Modification 27:
After adopting the configuration of the above modification 26, the maximum output level (volume) is maintained when the output of the RTC production music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output. good. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Players who watch the RTC production music output at the maximum output level (volume) are fascinated by the power of the production performed at the maximum output level (volume), so even after the RTC production is finished, it is maximum. There may be a request to continue the game at the output level (volume) of. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect is completed.

Further, after adopting the configuration of the above modification 26, when the output of the RTC production music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output, the output level (volume) preset by the player is used. ) May be used. According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC production that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC production can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. can.

Further, after adopting the configuration of the above modification 26, when the output of the RTC production music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output, the player sets the audio output level (volume). The volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the background music may be output at the voice output level (volume) specified by the player. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who has watched the RTC directed music output at the maximum output level (volume) gets used to the loud volume, the favorite output level (volume) may change from that before watching the RTC directed music. Therefore, after the RTC effect is completed, there may be a request to reset the audio output level (volume) to a desired output level. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's request to reset the audio output level (volume) to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is completed.

K28. Modification 28:
The method for determining the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display may be different from the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one of the multiple displayed hold displays is determined by the prior determination process to win the jackpot lottery, the plurality of displayed jackpot random numbers are displayed. By setting the display mode of the hold display to a specific pattern display mode, it is highly likely that the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one of the displayed hold displays will win the jackpot lottery. , May be suggested to the player. For example, when four hold displays Dm11 to hold display Dm14 are displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display Dm14 is selected for the jackpot lottery by the prior determination process. When it is determined that the winner is won, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to red, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to white, and the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to red. That is, by changing the display mode of the plurality of displayed hold displays to a specific pattern such as "white / red / white / red", a jackpot corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold displays. It can be suggested to the player that the random number counter C1 is likely to win the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when it is determined by the prior determination process that the jackpot random number counter C1 in the predetermined reserved game times wins the jackpot lottery, the reserved display of the predetermined reserved game times and the predetermined reserved game times are generated. By determining the display pattern of the hold display of the hold game times generated thereafter to a specific display pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold displays is selected for the jackpot lottery. You may suggest to the player that you are likely to win. In this case, after the predetermined reserved game times are generated, the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the display mode of the hold display of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry is displayed. When deciding, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined (the hold display of the predetermined hold game times determined by the pre-determination process when the jackpot lottery is won). It can be realized by determining the display mode of the hold display based on the above.

K29. Modification 29:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

L. About the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means that sequentially notifies the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means (MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments) is
If the special information relating to the second game, which is executed after the first game, satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game is reproduced (processing of case a2 in the first embodiment, processing in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). The process of c2 and the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A1, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game in the second game, even though the special information related to the second game satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. After that, only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the game is played. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game time an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1, and further
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a privilege to the player is provided after the game times related to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition.
The effect executing means is
In the first case where the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition.
After the start of the special gaming state executed after the first game round and before the start of the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. (The process of case a1 in the first embodiment and the process of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
When the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the second case
In the second game, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game is reproduced (process of case a2 in the first embodiment, process in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A2, when the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is the effect already executed. It functions as a reproduction role, and the player recognizes it as such. On the other hand, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in terms of the effect already executed. However, in reality, it is executed because the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game round, when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the second game round only at that time. The reproduction performed in the game round does not merely reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round, but is caused by the fact that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. The player recognizes that the information is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness and give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the already executed effect.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The effect executing means is
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round, a suggestion effect suggesting that the effect already executed is reproduced before the reproduction (first embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect) executed in the fourth embodiment is executed.

According to the feature A3, since the suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, the effect executed in the second game time is the first game. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the times. After that, the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, and then the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Furthermore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine described in feature A3.
The effect executing means is
If there is another game between the first game and the second game,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A4, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is performed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. And reproduction can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4.
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game times before the first game time, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game time. (The process of case c1 and the process of case c2 in the third embodiment are executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A5, even when the continuous effect is executed from the game times before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. ..

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to the player.
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is a gaming machine including a reach effect, which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature A6, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is the effect executed in the first game time in terms of the effect. It is executed as at least a part of the reproduction, but in reality, it is executed because the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least the effect executed in the first game round. It is executed as a partial reproduction and as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in terms of production, but in reality, special information related to the game time is predetermined. At least three cases can be set, one is executed due to the condition being satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means that sequentially notifies the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
Game times (first to third embodiments) executed after the specific game times (first game times in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized in that a timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific gaming time is determined based on the special information relating to the second gaming time).

According to the feature B1, since the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times is determined based on the special information related to the game times executed after the specific game times, it is special for the reproduction. It is possible to give a meaning to the player, increase the player's attention to the reproduction, and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
The effect executing means is
The determination (step S1022) of whether or not the special information relating to the game times executed after the specific game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the predetermined condition is performed before the determination means. As well as running
Based on the result of the determination executed before the determination means, the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times is determined (the processing of steps S2302 to S2312 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature B2, by executing the determination as to whether or not the special information related to the game times executed after the specific game times satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means, the effect executed in the specific game times is performed. It is possible to determine the effect in the game times to be executed before the game times determined to reproduce at least a part in consideration of the game times to execute the reproduction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to execute an effect related to the reproduction as an effect in the game times to be executed before the game times determined to execute the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2.
The effect executing means is
Among the game times executed after the specific game times, the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the second in the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment and the case c2 of the third embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific gaming times.

According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the game times to be played satisfies the predetermined conditions. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition, thereby giving the game unexpectedness. be able to. That is, by making the game times unpredictable by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3.
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting that an already executed effect is reproduced is executed before at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times is reproduced.

According to the feature B4, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed, the player's attention and interest in at least a part of the reproduction of the effect executed in the specific game times. Can be improved. In addition, when at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the reproduction is further executed by executing the suggestion effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the special information relating to the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine described in feature B4.
The effect executing means is
When there is another game time between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature B5, even if there is another game time between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, it is suggested in the other game time. By executing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the suggestive effect and the effect executed in the specific game times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5.
In the case where the effect executing means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times.
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a reach effect which is an effect executed in the specific game times and which suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature B6, the reach effect, which was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time in the effect, was actually executed based on the special information related to the game time. By making the player recognize the above, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least a part of the effect executed in a specific game time. When it is executed as a reproduction, and in terms of the production, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the production executed in a specific game time, but in reality, the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set, one for execution due to the cause and the other for execution. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means that sequentially notifies the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special game state start means for starting the special game state for giving the player a privilege, and the special game state start means.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state (first embodiment). In case a1 and case a2, the second embodiment, and the case c1 and the case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game round is determined by the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the second game round. Determine / S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C1, the effect considering the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state can be executed in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in feature C1.
The effect executing means is
When the special game state is executed and the special information related to the predetermined game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In case a1 in the first embodiment and case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special gaming state after the first gaming round).
When the special gaming state is executed and the special information related to the predetermined gaming time is the second satisfying the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined gaming time. Execute (In case a2 in the first embodiment, second embodiment, and case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game round).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C2, when the special information related to the predetermined game times does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, the predetermined effect executed in the special game state is performed, and the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined conditions. In this case, by executing the game at the predetermined game times, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
The predetermined effect is a game machine that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the game times executed before the special gaming state.

According to the feature C3, even though the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined conditions, at least the effect executed in the game times executed before the special game state in the predetermined game times Since a part of the information is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined conditions. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the predetermined game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, thereby making the game unexpected. Can be granted. That is, by setting the predetermined game times to the player's unexpected development, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine described in feature C3.
When the game times executed before the special game state are defined as the first game times, and the predetermined game times executed after the special game state are defined as the second game times, the game times are defined as the second game times.
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes an effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game when the special information relating to the first game satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction). The target effect is the first by winning the jackpot lottery related to the first game in the cases a1 and a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the cases c1 and c2 of the third embodiment. Including the production performed in the game times of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C4, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game round is executed in the first game round by satisfying the predetermined condition. The production is reproduced in the second game. Therefore, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game only when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information relating to the second game round has been executed due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and to give the game unexpectedness. In addition, the player's attention, interest, and expectation for reproduction can be improved.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4.
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is a gaming machine including a reach effect, which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature C5, in the game times (first game times) executed before the special game state when the special information related to the predetermined game times (second game times) satisfies the predetermined conditions. The executed reach effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, in the second game, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that was executed in the game that was executed before the special game state in terms of the effect is actually the second. By making the player recognize that the special information related to the game times has been executed due to satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, there are cases where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and cases where the game is executed before the special game state. When it is executed as at least a part of the reproduction of the effect executed in, and when it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game times executed before the special game state, it is actually executed. Can be set to at least three cases, that is, a case where the special information related to the game is executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature C2 to feature C5.
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is to be executed is executed before the predetermined effect is executed.

According to the feature C6, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect to be executed by executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is executed before executing the predetermined effect. The degree of interest can be improved.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine described in feature C6.
The effect executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special game state is executed.
When there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times), and the suggestion effect is executed.
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game times (in the second embodiment, the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C7, even when another game time exists between the special game state and the predetermined game time, the suggestion effect and the predetermined game time are performed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The production can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature C8]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature C3 to feature C7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of an effect executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special gaming state.

According to the feature C8, even when the continuous effect is executed over at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state, the continuous effect can be reproduced. can.

<Feature D group>
Feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means that sequentially notifies the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special game state start means for starting the special game state for giving the player a privilege, and the special game state start means.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The special game state starting means is
When the special information relating to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the second special game state is started.
The effect executing means is
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game times (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined by the first case a1. By the relationship between the game times executed before the game times [corresponding to the first game times in the feature group] and the first game times [corresponding to the second game times in the feature group] in case a1. , The first game time of case a2 [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605], which is determined to be the effect to be executed in the special game state after the first game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group]. Depending on the relationship between [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the second game time in case a2 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group], the second game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] Corresponds to 2 game times] Determines the effect to be executed in the special game state after [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D1, the second special executed after the second game round in consideration of the special information of the first game round in which the special information is executed before the second game round satisfying the predetermined condition. It is possible to execute the effect in the game state. Therefore, it is possible to have a relationship between the special information related to the first game time and the effect in the second special game state, and various effects are provided from the first game time to the second special game state. Can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine described in feature D1.
When the second special game state is executed when the special information relating to the second game times satisfies the predetermined condition.
The effect executing means is
When the special information relating to the first game times satisfies the predetermined condition (when the relationship between the first game times and the second game times in the case a2 of the first embodiment),
In the second game (the second game of case a2 of the first embodiment), the effect executed in the first game (the first game of case a2 of the first embodiment). Reproduce at least a part (execute the processing of S2308 and S2309) and
When the special information relating to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (a game time executed before the first game time and the first game time in case a1 of the first embodiment). In the case of a relationship of),
In the second special gaming state (special gaming state after the first gaming round of case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second gaming round (first gaming round of case a1 of the first embodiment). Reproduce at least a part of the executed production (execute the processing of S2605)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D2, even though the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, in the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. .. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, which is surprising to the game. Gender can be imparted. That is, by making the second game time an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game. Further, when the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced in the second special game round, so that the second It is possible to satisfy the player's request to re-appreciate the effect executed when the special information related to the game times of is satisfied with the predetermined conditions.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine described in feature D2.
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game in the second game (the first game and the second game in case a2 of the first embodiment). (If there is a relationship), the first suggestion effect suggesting that the already executed effect is to be reproduced is executed (the process of S2606 is executed) before the reproduction is performed.
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time in the second special game state (the game time executed before the first game time in case a1 of the first embodiment). (In the case of a relationship between and the first game times), before the reproduction, the second suggestion effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed (the process of S2605 is executed). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D3, the first suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round, and at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. Since the second suggestion effect is executed before the second suggestion effect is performed, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round or at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. It is possible to improve the degree of attention and interest of the player.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to the feature D2 or D3.
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game in the second game (the first game and the second game in case a2 of the first embodiment). If it becomes a relationship),
In the first special game state in which the special information related to the first game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed (S2606). Execute processing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D4, by executing an effect suggesting the content of the effect in the game times after the first special game state in the first special game state, the game times after the end of the first special game state are obtained. It is possible to improve the degree of attention, the degree of interest, and the sense of expectation of the player.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D4.
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is a gaming machine including a reach effect, which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature D5, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is actually caused by the special information related to the second game time. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. Further, when at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game time is executed in the second special game state, so that the second game time is executed. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to re-appreciate the reach effect in the game times. Further, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect. It is executed when it is executed and as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the production, but in reality, it is executed because the special information related to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means that sequentially notifies the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
The effect execution means for executing the effect in each of the game times, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the special information relating to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information relating to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition. (In the case of case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced.
It has already been executed after the execution of the effect in the first game round and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round. A gaming machine characterized by performing a suggestive effect that suggests that the effect is reproduced.

According to the feature E1, in the second game round, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition even though the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Since at least a part of the effect executed in is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestion effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, at least the effect executed in the first game time is executed in the second game time. It is possible to give the player more recognition that only a part is reproduced. Then, only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the game is played. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game time an unexpected development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in feature E1.
The effect executing means is
In addition to the case where the special information relating to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition.
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment). )Also,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced.
It is characterized in that a suggestion effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed after the execution of the effect in the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round. Gaming machine.

According to the feature E2, even when the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game round is performed. Since at least a part of the effect executed in one game time is reproduced, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the special information related to the game time in which the reproduction is executed does not always satisfy a predetermined condition. .. As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game is reproduced, the player is given an inflection of feelings and a sense of expectation, and the player's player's feeling is given to the game in which the reproduction is executed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further
A special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is provided.
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of case a2 in the first embodiment). for,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced.
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed after the start of a special gaming state executed after the first gaming round and before the reproduction in the second gaming round.

According to the feature E3, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game round is executed in the first game round by satisfying the predetermined condition. The production is reproduced in the second game. Therefore, only when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time. However, in reality, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness by making the player recognize that the special information related to the second game was executed because the predetermined condition was satisfied. can. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reproduction of the production. Further, if at least a part of the effect executed in the first game is reproduced due to the special information related to the second game satisfying a predetermined condition, the player is given a privilege. Since the special game state in which the player is given is started, the player's expectation for the reproduction of the effect can be further improved.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to the player.
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is a gaming machine including a reach effect, which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature E4, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed in the first game round is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, in terms of the production, the reach production performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the production performed in the first game round actually satisfies the predetermined condition with the special information related to the second game round. By making the player recognize that the game was executed due to the above, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game round. It is executed as a reproduction of a part and as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in terms of production, but in reality, the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set, one is executed due to the satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention, interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.
The effect executing means is
If there is another game between the first game and the second game,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed in the other gaming times.

According to the feature E5, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect and the suggestion effect can be obtained by executing the suggestion effect in the other game times. The reproduction can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5.
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game times before the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature E6, even when the continuous effect is executed from the game times before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. ..

The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, a reach effect that is executed with a low probability and an effect that is executed at a low frequency, such as an effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won. An effect that is executed at such a low frequency may be reproduced once by the player for the purpose of viewing. Conventionally, in order to meet such a demand of a player, a gaming machine that executes an effect that reproduces an effect once executed has been known.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. Is displayed on the image display means (objects A, B, and C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a).
The first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed on the image display means in a manner related to the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment). , By referring to the arrangement / timing table, each object is set and displayed so as to be displayed in a related manner / In S3305 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a related manner. Display each object based on each display pattern table set to be
A gaming machine characterized by that.

There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period). Multiple images are displayed according to their respective settings without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a plurality of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the effect is complicated.

According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed in a manner related to the second image, and therefore the first image and the first image are displayed. The effect executed by displaying the two images in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. Further, since the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image and may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, a plurality of different images may be displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively utilized.

[Feature F2]
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
The game machine having the relationship includes a mode in which the first image and the second image are related to each other and have a narrative character.

According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a narrative manner in relation to each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) can be an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Further, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period has a narrative character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image is
It is different from the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). S3203 / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F3, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image and in the period not overlapping with the second image. Since it is suggested, it is possible to perform a plurality of different modes of production using the first image, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the other images, so that the player's attention to the effect is different. , Interest level and expectation can be improved.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature F1 to feature F3.
The first image and the second image suggest different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game (processing of S3203 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various kinds of games by using the image.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature F1 to feature F4.
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner in which an image frame indicating a region of the first image is attached. Display and
When displaying the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner without the image frame.

According to the feature F5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be produced without a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature F1 to feature F5.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature F6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
Expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image, which is an image that changes over time,
An image display means for displaying the expected degree image as an effect, and
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The expected degree image storage means
The first expectation image and
The second expectation image and
Remember,
The control means
When the first expectation degree image is displayed on the image display means, and when
When the second expectation degree image is displayed on the image display means, and when
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image constituting at least a part of the period of the first expectation image in the time axis direction and at least a part of the period of the second expectation image in the time axis direction are formed. A case where a third expectation image, which is an expectation image obtained by combining a second partial image from which an image is extracted, and an expected degree image in a related manner, is displayed on the image display means.
There is
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as the first probability.
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as the second probability.
In the case where the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as the third probability.
The control means has such that the third probability is different from the first probability and is different from the second probability.
The first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means (displayed using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment). Display using the display pattern table in)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G1, as the expectation degree image to be displayed on the image display means, in addition to the first expectation degree image and the second expectation degree image, the first partial image and the second partial image are related. Since the third expectation image combined in the embodiment is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation image and the second expectation image. Since the third expectation image is an expectation image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a manner in which they are related to each other, it does not give a complicated impression to the player and is produced. The quality can be improved. Further, the image display means for displaying the first expectation degree image, the second expectation degree image, or the third expectation degree image so that the third probability is different from the first probability and is different from the second probability. Since it is displayed on the screen, the player's attention to the expected degree image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
Features The gaming machine described in G1.
The control means
When the first partial image is extracted from the first expectation image, the images in different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image are extracted, so that the first partial image is extracted in a plurality of different display modes. A third expectation image is displayed on the image display means,
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G2, when the first partial image is extracted from the first expectation image, a plurality of different displays are obtained by extracting images having different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image. Since it is possible to display the third expectation degree image on the image display means in the embodiment, various effects can be executed using the third expectation degree image. Further, since the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the third expectation image and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2.
The control means
When the first partial image is extracted from the first expectation image, the images in different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image are extracted, so that the first partial image is extracted in a plurality of different display modes. A third expectation image is displayed on the image display means,
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image to be displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is
The third expected degree image is preset for each of the plurality of different display modes (the arrangement position of each object is preset for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from those of the third expectation image. Since it is preset for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superposed as the third expectation image without any relation and are not displayed on the image display means. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G3.
The control means
When the first partial image is extracted from the first expectation image, the images in different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image are extracted, so that the first partial image is extracted in a plurality of different display modes. A third expectation image is displayed on the image display means,
The relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image to be displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is different from the plurality of different in the third expectation image. It is preset for each display mode (the display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G4, the relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image to be displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is different from the third expectation image. Since it is preset for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed on the image display means at a timing that is not related to each other as the third expectation image. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , Is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, the position relative to the second image is a predetermined arrangement position (arrangement in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position determined by a timing table / an arrangement position set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period). Multiple images are displayed according to their respective settings without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a plurality of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the effect is complicated.

According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the second image, the position relative to the second image is predetermined. Since it is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the effect. Can be done. Further, since the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image and may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, a plurality of different images may be displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively utilized.

[Feature H2]
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
The control means
In a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means during a period overlapping with the second image, and the first image is displayed on the image display means.
In accordance with each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is placed at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image (in the display / pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means at a set arrangement position).

According to the feature H2, since the first image is displayed in a plurality of different display modes in a period (same period) that overlaps with the second image, various types using the first image and the second image are used. The production can be executed. Further, since the first image is displayed on the image display means at a position relative to the second image at a predetermined arrangement position according to each of the plurality of different display modes, each display mode is displayed. In, the first image and the second image are not superposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the various effects performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) do not give a complicated impression to the player and improve the quality of the effects. Can be made to.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.
When the control means displays the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the control means has a predetermined timing relative to the second image (in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means at the display timing determined by the arrangement / timing table / the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the second image, it is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at any unrelated timing. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can be done.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H3.
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
It is different from the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature H4, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image and in the period not overlapping with the second image. Since it is suggested, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different modes of production having different degrees of advantages / disadvantages of the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the other images, so that the player's attention to the effect is different. , Interest level and expectation can be improved. Then, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the position relative to the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality is high. It is possible to provide a high-quality effect to the player.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4.
The first image and the second image suggest different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature H5, each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games depending on how the plurality of images are combined.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H5.
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner in which an image frame indicating a region of the first image is attached. Display and
When displaying the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner without the image frame.

According to the feature H6, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be produced without a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , Is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the timing is relatively predetermined with the second image (in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means at a determined display timing / display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period). Multiple images are displayed according to their respective settings without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a plurality of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the effect is complicated. The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game indicates the degree of whether the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the state of the game times is advantageous for the player, such as the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, the degree of expectation of being a probabilistic jackpot, and the degree of expectation that the game times are in a probabilistic state. Indicates the degree of existence or disadvantage.

According to the feature I1, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are not displayed at any unrelated timing. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can be done. Further, since the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image (same period) or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the first image is used. It is possible to perform a plurality of different forms of production, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in feature I1.
The control means has an arrangement position in which the relative position of the first image with respect to the second image is predetermined (arrangement position / first arranged in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment). 6 A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means at the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the embodiment).

According to feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the second image, the position relative to the second image is predetermined. Since it is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the effect. Can be done.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image is
It is different from the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I3, the degree of difference in the advantages / disadvantages of the game between the case where the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image and the case where the first image is displayed in the period not overlapping with the second image. Since it is suggested, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different modes of production having different degrees of advantages / disadvantages of the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with the other images, so that the player's attention to the effect is different. , Interest level and expectation can be improved. Then, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the position relative to the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality is high. It is possible to provide a high-quality effect to the player.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I3.
The first image and the second image suggest different degrees of advantages / disadvantages of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I4, each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games depending on how the plurality of images are combined.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4.
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner in which an image frame indicating a region of the first image is attached. Display and
When displaying the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner without the image frame.

According to the feature I5, the effect including the first image and the second image can be produced without a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I5.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature I6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Characteristic J group>
Feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image storage means for storing an image that enables the player to recognize the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation,
An image display means for displaying the image as an effect, and
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means
The first image stored in the image storage means, which enables the player to recognize the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation, is displayed on the image display means.
A combination image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, which is a recognition of advantages and disadvantages regarding the situation of the game, and is not combined with the second image. A combination image that enables the player to be given a recognition different from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment). , The display pattern of the object C (C1-C2-C3) is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog appearing from the box, and gives the player a recognition that the situation of the game is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C and the object B are combined is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the worsening weather, and the situation of the game is changed. Give the player the perception that it is disadvantageous / variant 15)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature J1, the recognition given to the player about the advantages / disadvantages of the game when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, and the first image is referred to as the second image. Since it is possible to change the perception given to the player about the advantages and disadvantages of the game when they are combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image, and the first Images can be used effectively. The game situation is based on the game state, for example, whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and whether or not the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. Refers to the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine described in Feature J1.
When the first image is displayed in combination with the second image, the control means determines the relative position between the first image and the second image according to the situation of the game. (Set at the arrangement position determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set at the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and display on the image display means. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature J2, the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means, so that the first image and the second image are displayed. Can be used to give the player various perceptions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2.
When the control means displays the first image in combination with the second image, the relative timing of displaying the first image on the image display means between the first image and the second image. Is set according to the situation of the game (set at the display timing determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set at the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying the first image and the second image on the image display means is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means. The image and the second image can be used to give the player various perceptions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature J1 to feature J3.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the first image or the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature J4, various effects can be executed by using an image which is an image that changes with time.

<Characteristic K group>
Feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
At least, an image storage means for storing the first image, the second image, and the third image,
An image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means, and an image display means.
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second image is more than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. When (an image of a dog appearing from the box of image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, it is more about the situation of the game for the player. Despite giving a favorable perception
By the control means, the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) and the image display means. The second image (the image of the dog coming out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) when displayed in. ), A gaming machine characterized in that it gives the player a more favorable perception of the situation of the game than when it is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature K1, when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, it is better for the player than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. When the first image is displayed in combination with the third image, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image, even though the game situation is given an advantageous recognition. , Gives the player a favorable perception of the game situation. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects depending on how the images are combined. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the situation of the game differs depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means.

[Feature K2]
Feature The gaming machine described in K1.
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time.
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-varying image. Game machine.

According to the feature K2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-varying image, the first image and the second image are partially from the first time-changing image. By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, it is possible to further perform various effects.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2.
The control means
The first case where the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and the case where the first image is displayed on the image display means.
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

According to the feature K3, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the case where the second image is not combined with the third image and the case where the image is not displayed are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects using the first image and the second image.

[Feature K4]
Features The gaming machine described in K3.
In the second case, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1)). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature K4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (in the first case). Therefore, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the case of displaying (the second case). Therefore, the state is in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the first image and the second image having such characteristics in combination with the third image, more various effects can be executed.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature K1 to feature K4.
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time.
The third image (image B3) is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a partial image constituting at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to the feature K5, since the third image is a partial image constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-varying image, various effects can be produced by using the second time-changing image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-varying image are displayed in combination, the third image that is a part of the second time-varying image is the first image or the first image. When it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, the player can change his / her perception of the situation of the game.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
At least, an image storage means for storing the first image, the second image, and the third image,
An image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means, and an image display means.
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second image is more than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. When (an image of a dog appearing from the box of image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting
By the control means, the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) and the image display means. The second image (the image of the dog coming out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) when displayed in. ), The game machine is characterized in that the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than when it is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature L1, the special information is predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. When the first image is displayed in combination with the third image, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image, even though the probability that the condition is satisfied is high. There is a high probability that the special information meets the prescribed conditions. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image can be improved.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in feature L1.
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time.
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-varying image. Game machine.

According to the feature L2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-varying image, the first time-changing image is displayed. If so, the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2.
The control means
The first case where the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and the case where the first image is displayed on the image display means.
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, an image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed, and a case where the second image is not displayed is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects using the first image and the second image.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine described in feature L3.
In the second case, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1)). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (in the first case). Therefore, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the case of displaying (the second case). Therefore, the state is in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the first image and the second image having such characteristics in combination with the third image, more various effects can be executed.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to the feature L4.
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time.
The third image (image B3) is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a partial image constituting at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-varying image, various effects can be produced by using the second time-changing image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-varying image are displayed in combination, the third image that is a part of the second time-varying image is the first image or the first image. When it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, the player can change his / her perception of the situation of the game.

The inventions of the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic M group>
Feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature M1]
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition, and
As the first display mode, an image display means for displaying the first moving image (background moving image) and
A sound output means for outputting a moving image-compatible sound (background music), which is a sound corresponding to the first moving image, in a first output mode (a mode in which background music is output at a predetermined volume).
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode (mode for displaying a demo moving image), and the sound output means is changed from the first output mode to the second output mode (background music). A transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for shifting to the mode in which output is stopped), is satisfied.
A return condition determining means for determining whether or not a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode, is satisfied.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
If the above transition conditions are met,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode.
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode.
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode.
The image display means returns to the first display mode, and when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, displays from a predetermined time position of the first moving image. To start,
The sound output means returns to the first output mode, and when the moving image corresponding sound is output in the first output mode, the output is started from a predetermined time position of the moving image corresponding sound. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

According to the feature M1, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the first moving image, and the sound output means is the first output mode. When returning to and outputting the moving image compatible sound, the output is started from a predetermined time position of the moving image compatible sound. Therefore, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means becomes the second according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. Compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the moving image 1 is started fluctuates, the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image changes according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display means returns after shifting to the second display mode. When the condition is satisfied, the configuration for starting the display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode, and the image display means are the first. When returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, the configuration and image in which the temporal position of the first moving image that starts the display is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the second display mode. Even after the display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process, and when the display means returns from the second display mode to the first display mode. Is a configuration for displaying a first moving image that is continuously played as an internal process.

[Feature M2]
Feature The gaming machine described in M1.
If the above transition conditions are met,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the video-compatible sound is reduced with the passage of time while continuing the output of the video-compatible sound. death,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing at which the sound output means shifts to the second output mode.
If the return condition is satisfied during the period in which the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image, and the image display means continues.
The sound output means is a gaming machine characterized in that the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound is returned to the volume in the first output mode to return to the first output mode.

According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display means continues the first display mode, and the sound output means returns the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first. Since the output mode is restored, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.
If the above transition conditions are met,
The sound output means outputs the moving image corresponding sound at a volume of the first loudness. From the first output mode, the moving sound corresponding to the moving image has a second loudness smaller than the volume of the first loudness. Shift to the second output mode of outputting at the volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a predetermined time elapses after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode.
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode.
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image, and the image display means continues.
The sound output means is a gaming machine characterized in that the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound is returned to the volume of the first loudness to return to the first output mode.

According to the feature M3, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image is displayed. The means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound to the volume of the first loudness. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M3.
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal starting position of the first moving image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is the temporal leading position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, and the first display mode and the first display mode and When returning to the first output mode, the display is started from the temporal beginning position of the first moving image, and the output is started from the temporal beginning position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the time middle position of the first moving image and the output is started from the time middle position of the moving image corresponding sound. Can be done. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the first moving image and the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the moving sound, the player can satisfy the return condition. After that, the first video and video compatible sound will be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, so it is unsatisfactory that there is a sense of discomfort or there is a part of the first video and video compatible sound that is not viewed. You may feel the sound. On the other hand, according to the feature M4, since the player can be made to appreciate the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image from the first position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M4.
The second display mode is a mode in which a second moving image different from the first moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first moving image is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which the first moving image is hidden. A mode of displaying a still image different from the first moving image, or a mode of hiding the moving image and the still image.
The first output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a volume of the first loudness.
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image-corresponding sound is output at a volume of a second loudness lower than the volume of the first loudness, or a mode in which the output of the moving image-corresponding sound is stopped. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature M5, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition is satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have been shifted to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
Features The gaming machine described in M5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the volume of the second loudness is equal to or lower than the volume of a loudness that the player cannot recognize.

According to the feature M6, when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving sound is lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize, so that the transition condition is satisfied and the sound is output. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M6.
A special game state start means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is provided.
In the transition condition determining means, a predetermined time has elapsed without starting either the special gaming state or the next gaming round after the gaming round for displaying the result of the determination by the determining means is completed. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined time elapses without starting either the special gaming state or the next gaming round after the gaming round is completed, it is highly possible that the player is not playing the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be satisfied in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing the game.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M7.
Equipped with a detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected into the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball is not detected by the detecting means for a predetermined time.

According to the feature M8, if the game ball is ejected to the game board, the transition condition is not satisfied, so that the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing, which is an unpleasant situation for the player. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M8.
The gaming machine characterized in that the return condition determining means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature M9, when the special information is acquired, the image display means returns to the first display mode and the sound output means returns to the first output mode, so that the expectation that the special information is acquired is expected. Can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M9.
Equipped with a detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected into the game board,
The return condition determining means is a gaming machine that determines that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is unpleasant for the player, such as not being established for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature N1]
As the first display mode, an image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) and
As a first output mode, a sound output means for outputting a moving image compatible sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level, and a sound output means.
Command receiving means to receive commands and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is in another display mode (a mode in which a demo movie is displayed) in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is cut off, and the sound output means is cut off in continuity with the moving image corresponding sound. Another output mode (a mode in which the output of the background music is stopped) is an identification information storage means for storing identification information (cue determination flag) that can identify the specific mode.
When the command receiving means receives a specific command (return condition satisfying command), the determination means for determining whether or not the specific mode is based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means. When,
With
When the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11). teeth,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying from a predetermined time position of the predetermined moving image (FIG. 11).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined time position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature N1, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image in which the image display means starts to display. Since the time position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving image-compatible sound is predetermined, it is possible to easily synchronize the predetermined moving image with the moving image-compatible sound.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in feature N1.
When the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that it is not the specific mode based on the identification information, the image display means has continuity with the predetermined moving image. In the case of the maintained display mode (when the mode is from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in the continuous mode (FIGS. 12 and 13).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature N2, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which the continuity with the predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means is used. Continuously displays a predetermined video in a manner that maintains continuity, and the sound output means outputs a video-compatible sound corresponding to the predetermined video that maintains continuity, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , The image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2.
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal starting position of the predetermined moving image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is the temporal leading position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature N3, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image in which the image display means starts to display. Since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the video-compatible sound is the temporal start position, the display is started from the middle of the predetermined video and the output is started from the middle of the video-compatible sound. The processing executed by the image display means and the sound output means is easier and the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the image display means and the sound output means are used.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature N1 to feature N3.
The other display mode is a gaming machine in which the image display means is displaying an image different from the predetermined moving image, or is a mode in which the display of the image is stopped.

According to the feature N4, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode from the specific mode, the other display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which the image is displayed or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped, even if the display returns to the first display mode and the display is started from a predetermined time position of the predetermined moving image. , The discomfort given to the player can be reduced. The image includes a moving image and a still image.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4.
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output means outputs another sound different from the video-compatible sound, the sound output means is compatible with the video or the other sound at an output level that the player cannot recognize. A gaming machine characterized in that the sound output means is stopped from outputting.

According to the feature N5, when the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the other output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is different from the moving sound. Since it is a mode in which another sound is output, a mode in which a moving image is supported or another sound is output at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player, or a mode in which the output is stopped, the first output mode is performed. Even if the player returns and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined time position, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

<Characteristic O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature O1]
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, and
As the first display mode, an image display means for displaying the first moving image (background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81), and an image display means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The image display means
When it is determined by the elapsed time determining means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the mode shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode (a mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode, and the first display mode shifts to the first display mode. When displaying the moving image of No. 1, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the first moving image (FIGS. 80 and 81).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the display mode shifts from the second display mode to the first display mode and returns to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the first moving image. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first display mode is shifted to the first display mode and the first moving image is displayed. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first display mode is shifted to the first display mode and the first moving image is displayed, for example, the second display mode is predetermined. When the display period ends, the display of the first moving image is started from the time position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means. Determines the temporal position of the first moving image to start displaying based on the elapsed time after shifting to the second display mode when the second display mode shifts to the first display mode. Even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process, and the second display mode shifts to the first display mode. In some cases, as an internal process, a configuration for displaying a first moving image that is continuously played may be mentioned.

In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines of feature O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially at the same time in each gaming machine, and the first display mode is entered, and each game is played. When the machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, the machine starts the display from a predetermined time position of the first moving image, so that the first displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos of. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine described in feature O1.
A transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for shifting the image display means to the third display mode (a mode for displaying a demo moving image), is satisfied, is provided.
The image display means
When the transition condition is satisfied in the first display mode (in the mode of displaying the background moving image), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the establishment of the transition condition (FIG. 11).
When the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode (in the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the predetermined display period of the second display mode has expired. Shift to the third display mode (Fig. 82),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when shifting to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demo moving image), the display is started from a predetermined time position of the third moving image.

According to the feature O2, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is preliminarily used. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines of feature O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially at the same time in each gaming machine, and the third display mode is entered, and each game is played. When the machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, the machine starts the display from a predetermined time position of the third moving image, so that the third displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos of. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine described in feature O2,
A return condition determining means for determining whether or not a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image), is satisfied.
The image display means
When the return condition is satisfied in the third display mode (in the mode of displaying the demo moving image), the return condition is returned to the first display mode (FIG. 11).
When the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode (in the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the predetermined display period of the second display mode has expired. Returning to the first display mode (Fig. 83),
A gaming machine characterized in that when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the display is started from the predetermined time position of the first moving image.

According to the feature O3, even if the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is not interrupted in advance. Since the display mode returns to the first display mode when the predetermined display period has expired, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 to feature O3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal starting position of the first moving image.

According to the feature O4, when shifting to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the game is compared with a configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the first moving image. It is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the person. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the first moving image when shifting to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the player can use the first display mode. Since the first video is viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a part of the first video that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, since the player can be made to watch the first moving image from the first position in time, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the first It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she can watch all the videos from the beginning of the time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O5]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 to feature O4.
A sound output means for outputting a moving image-compatible sound, which is a sound corresponding to a moving image displayed by the image display means, is provided.
When the image display means starts displaying the first moving image from the predetermined time position, the sound output means has a first moving image corresponding sound (background) corresponding to the first moving image. A gaming machine characterized in that output is started from a predetermined time position of (music).

According to the feature O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first moving image-compatible sound are easily synchronized with each other as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the output of the first moving image-compatible sound starts varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image-corresponding sound is started fluctuates, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display means is the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined time position, the first moving image corresponding sound is output from the time position of the first moving image corresponding sound that was output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. When shifting to the configuration for starting the output of the moving image compatible sound or the mode for outputting the first moving image compatible sound, the image display means displays the temporal position of the first moving image compatible sound for starting the output in the second display. The configuration is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode, and even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image-compatible sound is continued as an internal process. At the same time, when the image display means shifts or returns from the second display mode to the first display mode, there is a configuration for outputting the first moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as an internal process. ..

[Feature O6]
The gaming machine described in feature O5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image-corresponding sound is the temporal head position of the first moving image-corresponding sound.

According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the first moving image corresponding sound. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a position in the middle of time of the first video-corresponding sound, the player can appreciate the first video-corresponding sound from a position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility of feeling uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a part of the first video-compatible sound that is not viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, since the player can be made to appreciate the first video-corresponding sound from the first position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and also to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the first moving sound can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O7]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature O2 to feature O3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal starting position of the third moving image.

According to the feature O7, when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, the player can see the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the third moving image. It is possible to reduce the discomfort given. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, the player can use the third display mode. Since the video is viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a part of the third video that is not viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, since the player can be made to watch the third moving image from the first position in time, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the third moving image can be reduced. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she can watch all the videos from the beginning of the time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature O2 to feature O4.
A sound output means for outputting a moving image-compatible sound, which is a sound corresponding to a moving image displayed by the image display means, is provided.
When the image display means starts the display from the predetermined time position of the third moving image, the sound output means has a third moving image corresponding sound (demo) corresponding to the third moving image. A gaming machine characterized in that the output is started from a predetermined time position of (music).

According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image-compatible sound are easily synchronized with each other as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the output of the third moving image-compatible sound starts varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the production of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the sound corresponding to the third moving image is started fluctuates, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display means is the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined time position, the third moving image corresponding sound is output from the time position of the third moving image corresponding sound that was output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. When shifting to the configuration for starting the output of the moving image compatible sound or the mode for outputting the third moving image compatible sound, the image display means displays the temporal position of the third moving image compatible sound for starting the output in the second display. The configuration is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode, and even after the image display means shifts from the third display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the third moving image compatible sound is continued as an internal process. At the same time, when the image display means shifts from the second display mode to the third display mode, a configuration for outputting a third moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as an internal process and the like can be mentioned.

[Feature O9]
The gaming machine described in Feature O8.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image-corresponding sound is the temporal head position of the third moving image-corresponding sound.

According to the feature O9, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the third moving image corresponding sound. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a position in the middle of time of the third video-compatible sound, the player can appreciate the third video-compatible sound from a position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility of feeling uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a part of the third video-compatible sound that is not viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, since the player can be made to appreciate the third video-corresponding sound from the first position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and also to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the third moving image-compatible sound can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The inventions of the feature M group, the feature N group, and the feature O group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various productions are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there are known gaming machines that display a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and output music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature P1]
A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entry section where game balls circulating in the game area can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
An acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined number of predetermined information.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, and
The hold display (hold display Dm11 to Dm14 and hold display Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means is displayed in a predetermined display mode. And the hold display means (the process of determining the content of the hold effect in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment) that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
Prior to the holding display means changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestion effect (FIG. 89, FIG. 90, FIG. 100, FIG. 105) suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Conventionally, by displaying the hold display, it has been performed to indicate to the player the number of game times to be executed. However, with regard to the hold display, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

According to the feature P1, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes is executed. Therefore, in response to the change in the display mode of the hold display, the game It is possible to draw people's attention and give a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine described in feature P1.
The effect executing means selects the suggestion effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target for which the hold display means changes the display mode among the displayed hold displays (the effect execution means). Hold effect content determination process in the 8th and 9th embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature P2, since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected according to the hold display to be the target whose display mode changes, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, and the display mode is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which is the hold display.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the more the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information is changed in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays, the more the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width at the plurality of stages of the display mode increases between before and after the change in the display mode of (FIGS. 92, 97, 98). , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, the chance of changing the display mode decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means becomes shorter. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determination means is earlier, and the hold display corresponding to the special information is in the order determined by the determination means later in the displayed hold display. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information of, and the display mode is less likely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information in the order of determination by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature P3, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The more, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes large. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display, which is determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display, changes relatively later, the hold display is displayed. Since the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and rather, further expectations. A feeling can be given.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to the display mode of the upper stage (FIGS. 101, 103, 104).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed, and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player changes the display mode of a specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. In some cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature P4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is preceded by the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher stage than the display mode of. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display in which the player wishes to change the display mode is Even if the display mode is changed, the hold display in which the display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. It is possible to suppress the above, and rather, it is possible to give a further sense of expectation.

[Feature P5]
The gaming machine according to feature P3 or feature P4.
The production execution unit
When the suggestion effect is executed, it depends on the size of the stepwise width at a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means. Then, the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the plurality of types of suggestion effects (8th to 10th embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature P5, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width at a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the list, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, and as a suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type of production to be performed.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature Q1]
A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entry section where game balls circulating in the game area can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
An acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined number of predetermined information.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A hold display means for displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and a hold display means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The hold display means
When determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on special information corresponding to other hold display different from the hold display of the object for which the display mode is determined (8th embodiment). To the tenth embodiment and the modified example 28)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q1, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the other hold display different from the hold display of the object for which the display mode is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the hold game times) corresponding to the other hold display by using the hold display of the target whose display mode is determined. For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined is sent to the player more than the special information to be determined by the determination means before the special information. When it is advantageous, in addition to the information of the hold display itself for which the display mode has been determined, such as determining the display mode of the hold display, which is the target for determining the display mode, to a specific display mode, for other hold displays. Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player not only infers the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, but also executes it before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the outcome of the reserved game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency more than before, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine described in feature Q1.
The hold display means
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed, based on the special information corresponding to other hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Determine the display mode (8th to 10th embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q2, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the special information corresponding to the hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Since the display mode after the change of the display is determined, the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed can be used to suggest to the player information about the hold game times corresponding to the other hold display. For example, a change in the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed based on special information corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. By determining the display mode later, the following game playability can be realized. As an example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Can also be changed to a higher-level display mode (display mode that is advantageous to the player). As described above, according to the feature Q2, various new game features can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine described in feature Q2.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the more the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information is changed in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays, the more the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width at the plurality of stages of the display mode increases between before and after the change in the display mode of (FIGS. 92, 97, 98). , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, the chance of changing the display mode decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means becomes shorter. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determination means is earlier, and the hold display corresponding to the special information is in the order determined by the determination means later in the displayed hold display. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information of, and the display mode is less likely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information in the order of determination by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q3, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays is changed. The more, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes large. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display, which is determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display, changes relatively later, the hold display is displayed. Since the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and rather, further expectations. A feeling can be given.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine described in feature Q2.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to the display mode of the upper stage (FIGS. 101, 103, 104).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed, and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player changes the display mode of a specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. In some cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is preceded by the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher stage than the display mode of. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display in which the player wishes to change the display mode is Even if the display mode is changed, the hold display in which the display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. It is possible to suppress the above, and rather, it is possible to give a further sense of expectation.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature Q2 to feature Q4.
Equipped with a production execution means to execute the production
The effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to the hold display means changing the display mode of the hold display (FIGS. 89, 90, 100, 105)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q5, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes is executed. Therefore, in response to the change in the display mode of the hold display, the game It is possible to draw people's attention and give a sense of expectation.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine described in feature Q5.
The production execution unit
When the suggestion effect is executed, it depends on the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means. Then, the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the plurality of types of suggestion effects (8th to 10th embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q6, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width at a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the list, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, and as a suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the type of production to be performed.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature R1]
A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entry section where game balls circulating in the game area can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
An acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined number of predetermined information.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A hold display means that displays a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode and changes the display mode of the hold display displayed.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
The effect execution determination process for determining whether or not the effect execution condition, which is the condition for executing a predetermined effect, is satisfied is executed, and the effect execution determination process is executed.
The hold display means
In addition to determining whether or not the display mode change condition, which is a condition for changing the display mode of the hold display, is satisfied,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed (8th to 10th embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the display mode of the hold display is changed independently of the execution of the predetermined effect even though the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the player is given a predetermined effect. It is not possible to recognize that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and it is not possible to draw the player's attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display only bring about different effects for the player, and these two do not function synergistically.

According to the feature R1, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation with the above, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display by utilizing the execution of the predetermined effect. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a feeling of expectation and urgency to the subsequent game times, a predetermined effect. By changing the display mode of the hold display after the effect of, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and urgency in response to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and to improve the interest of the synergistic game. Can be planned.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine described in feature R1.
The hold display means
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined effect is executed (10th embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature R2, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined effect is executed, so that the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to overturn the player's perception that the display mode of the hold display will change after this is done, and it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, when a predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R3]
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2.
A selection means (effect operation button 24) for the player to select a predetermined hold display is provided.
The hold display means
In addition to executing the changeable determination process that determines whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of each displayed hold display,
Based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process, it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied (10th embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature R3, it is possible to create a new playability such as allowing the player to select the hold display. Further, since it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process, the hold display selected by the player himself / herself is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R4]
The gaming machines described in features R1 to R3.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the more the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information is changed in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays, the more the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width at the plurality of stages of the display mode increases between before and after the change in the display mode of (8th embodiment and 10th embodiment). form)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, the chance of changing the display mode decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means becomes shorter. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determination means is earlier, and the hold display corresponding to the special information is in the order determined by the determination means later in the displayed hold display. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information of, and the display mode is less likely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information in the order of determination by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature R4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The more, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes large. Therefore, if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display that is determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display changes relatively later (or is selected by the player). Even when the display mode of the hold display is changed), the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes large, so that the player can use the display mode. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the feeling of expectation, and rather, it is possible to give a feeling of further expectation.

[Feature R5]
The gaming machines described in features R1 to R3.
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level is set according to the high or low possibility of the hold display. It is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88 (b)).
The hold display means
The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to the hold display, and is determined.
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to a display mode of a higher stage (9th embodiment and 10th embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed, and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player changes the display mode of a specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. In some cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature R5, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is preceded by the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher stage than the display mode of. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display in which the player wishes to change the display mode is Even when the display mode is changed (or when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changed), the hold display whose display mode has changed is the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher level, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and rather, it is possible to give a further expectation.

The inventions of the feature P group, the feature Q group, and the feature R group solve the following problems.

Conventionally, by displaying the hold display, it has been performed to indicate to the player the number of game times to be executed.

Here, for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, further improvement of the technique is desired.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature R group are appropriately combined may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. A section, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry section, and an information acquisition means.
A gaming machine including an acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples are used to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned above. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... 1st starting port 34 ... 2nd starting port 34a ... Electric Accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening and closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... 1st result display section 37b ... 2nd result display section 37c ... 1st hold display section 37d ... 2nd hold display section 38 ... Normal drawing unit 39 ... Round Display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Design display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main Display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56. .. Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
63a ... Win / fail table storage area 63b ... Sorting table storage area 63c ... Reach judgment table storage area 63d ... Fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electric service hold area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f ... First determination processing result Storage area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice emission control device 91 ... Voice emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound / light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 96 ... RTC
100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
PA ... Game area PC ... Winning counter area AE ... Execution area Ra ... 1st hold area Rb ... 2nd hold area Dm11-1 to Dm14, Dm21 to Dm24 ... Hold display

Claims (4)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game.
An image storage means for storing a plurality of images including at least a first image, a second image, and a third image.
An image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means, and an image display means.
Until the result of the determination is notified, the means for executing the variation effect by the image display means and the means for executing the variation effect.
A control means for controlling the image display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the display during the variation effect by the control means, the second image is the third image as compared with the case where the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. When the image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game.
When the first image is combined with the third image and displayed on the image display means, the second image is combined with the third image and displayed on the image display means. Give the player a perception that the game situation is more favorable than in the case of
The control means
A means for displaying the first image on the image display means without combining the first image with the third image, and
A means for displaying the first image on the image display means without combining with the third image, and then displaying the second image on the image display means without combining with the third image.
A means for displaying the third image on the image display means without combining the first image and the second image, and
When displaying a combination of a plurality of images, means for displaying the respective images without superimposing them on each other, and
A fourth image different from the third image, which is combined with the second image and displayed on the image display means in combination with the first image. A means for displaying a fourth image on the image display means, which gives the player a recognition that the state is more advantageous for the game situation when displayed in
A process of combining the first image and the third image and displaying them on the image display means, and a process of combining the second image and the fourth image and displaying them on the image display means. With viable means
The second image and the fourth image are combined and displayed on the image display means rather than the case where the first image and the third image are combined and displayed on the image display means. When it is done, it gives the player a recognition that the game situation is in an advantageous state.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The first image is an image in which a plurality of images are combined.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The second image is an image in which a plurality of images are combined.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The third image is an image in which a plurality of images are combined.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images